Volvo - S40 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2002

Page 897
Fuses 11E/1-7
11D/No. Fuses In Cargo Compartment Fuse Box
11E Main Fuses At Battery
Cargo Compartment Fuses

Page 423
Center the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator valves before the valves are pushed
into place.
Install:
- the control module. Tighten to 1.8 Nm
- the connectors for the pump motor and the control module
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2
See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake
Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing
- the integrated relay / fusebox. See Hydraulic unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Function test
See Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing. Use
VIDA vehicle communication to calibrate the control module.
Page 847
6/92-93 Motor, RL/RR Power Window
6/95 Damper Motor, Temperature, LH Side
6/96 Damper Motor, Temperature, RH Side
6/102 Damper Motor, Defroster
6/103 Damper Motor, Floor/Ventilation

Page 1154
Continue - Fault Found
------------------------
Checking communication errors car model S40 (-04) / V40
Hint: Test the communication with another corresponding vehicle to decide if the malfunction is in
the vehicle or in VIDA/VCT/cable harness. If the communication works on another vehicle, the
malfunction is in the vehicle.
Hint: For current information about each circuit and signals, see wiring diagram and signal
description for each system.
Diagnostic outlet
- Check the voltage feed to diagnostic outlet #16. The voltage shall match battery voltage.
- Check the cable for power ground and signal ground to diagnostic outlet #4 and #5.
Hint: When VCT2000 is connected to the diagnostic outlet (is supplied with voltage), the indicator
diode shall be activated with a green light. Then the indicator diode flashes quickly when
communication takes place with a control module. In case of certain internal malfunctions on
VCT2000 the indicator diode is activated with a red light!
Communication cables k-line
- Check the communication cables between diagnostic outlet #7 and connected control modules for
open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage.
Communication cable for cruise control as own system (not integrated)
- Check the communication cable between diagnostic outlet #13 and cruise control for open circuit,
short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
Page 540
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 326
Page 834
3/130 Steering Wheel Module SWM
3/131 Switch, Audio/mobile Phone
3/135 RTI Switch
3/155 Automatic Transmission Program Selector
3/156 Gear Shift Module GSM, Automatic Transmission

Page 571
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 524
Fuses 11B/11-23
Fuses in the Passenger Compartment
Passenger Compartment Fuses

Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
TIE - Technical Journal
Title: New SW upgrade disc for RTI, MMM, MMM+, and MMM2 available
Ref No: US15493.10.2 en-GB
Issuer: -
Partner: 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group: 3972 Func Desc road navigation
Status: Released
Status Date: 2010-06-03
Issue date: 2010-06-03
Reference:
Attachment Vehicle Type
CSC
DTC
Text
This RTJ supersedes the previous one dated June 2, 2010, Changes to this document are:
- SW version corrected to 8BC6.
- Note added for clarification of Service SW disc purpose.
CSC = Customer Symptom Code
DTC = Diagnostic Trouble Code
MMM = Multi Media Module

Page 279
11E/1-7
11A Main Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Engine Compartment Fuses

Page 962
Use tools 951 2630 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2630 Terminal Removal
Tool and951 2631 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2631 Terminal Removal
Tool to remove the primary lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Connector, assembling
Page 989
Primary lock
Check that the cable terminal is undamaged. Press the cable terminal into the housing. Check that
the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable.
The secondary lock
Press the secondary lock into place.
Connector Type 7
Connectors, repair
Special tools: 951 2633 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2633 Terminal
Removal Tool
951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal Tool
951 2812 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal Removal Tool.
Note! As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or
models, some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
Connector, dismantling
Secondary lock
Press out the secondary lock from the cable side using tool 951 2633 Terminal removal tool See:
Tools and Equipment/951 2633 Terminal Removal Tool or an electrician's screwdriver, as
illustrated.
Page 169
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Second Generation Power Seats
Power Seat Module (PSM), Replacing
Power seat module (PSM), replacing

Removing the control module
Raise the seat to its highest position.
For first generation power seats:
Remove the seat from the car. See Lifting seats in and out See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
For second generation power seats:
Remove the seat from the car. See Removing power seats, tilting See: Body and
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Remove the key.
Note! The key must be removed to ensure that the ignition is not switched on by mistake.
Wait 1 minute before starting work.
Remove the two screws. Disconnect the connector. Remove the control module.
Installing the control module
Install:
- the control module
- the connector
- the two screws. The seat must be tightened to the floor. Tighten to 48 Nm.
- the key
Page 724
Remove:
- the screw (1) from the right-hand side of the tailgate sill trim panel
- the three screws (2) in the right-hand floor support
- the floor support.
Applies to S60 and S80
- Push the insulation panel to one side under the seat cushion on both sides
- Route the new cable harness along the side of the cargo compartment and out into the passenger
compartment as illustrated
- Position the end of the cable with the two large grey connectors on the left-hand side of the car
under the seat cushion by the cable duct
- Route the cable harness from the left-hand cable duct under the seat cushion, along the wheel
arch and out through the hole in the car body behind the backrest. Then route along the wheel arch
and rear crossmember over to the right-hand side of the car
- Continue to route the cable harness along the right-hand side of the cable duct and forward into
the car. Then route the cable out through the hole in the car body behind the lower edge of the
backrest. Continue to the existing ground terminals under the seat cushion
- Secure the cable harness at the existing cable harnesses and cable duct. Use the tie straps (1)
(from the kit)
- Find the pre-routed grey connector (2) by the left-hand tail lamp. Connect the grey connector to
the corresponding connector (3) from the routed cable harness.
Applies to the V70

Page 1391
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Service and Repair Gear Selector Assembly
and Steering Wheel Module
Gear selector assembly and steering wheel module
Removing the gear selector assembly and steering wheel module
Remove:
- the cover, steering column and boot
- steering wheel: -
S60according to Steering wheel, replacing See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering

Wheel/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel, Replacing
- V70according to Replacing the steering wheel See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering

Wheel/Service and Repair/Replacing the Steering Wheel.
- 3 screws.
- Disconnect the connectors
- Release the two clips
- Pull straight out.
Installing the gear selector assembly and steering wheel module
Install:
In reverse order.
Page 711
- Remove the three screws (1) from the right-hand floor support
- Remove the floor support.
- Take the wiring harness (1) from the kit and position it along the tailgate sill panel with the black
connector to the right.
- Carefully pull the tailgate sill panel upward at the left-hand corner until there is an audible click
and the clips release.
- Lift the panel and insert the wiring harness into the gap between the floor support (2) and the
panel.
- Insert the cable as far under the panel as possible. Ensure that the cable is not trapped
- Also insert the cable under the sill panel on the right side and then out to the rear edge of the
wheel housing.
- Remove the ground screw (1) and connect the ground cable of the new wiring harness to the
existing grounding point. Tighten the ground screw securely.
- Take four cable ties (2) from the kit and secure the wiring harness to the existing wiring harness
as illustrated.
- Press the sill panel into place.
- Reinstall the screws in the panel. Tighten.

Page 684
For the location of the relays, see:
1. Wiring diagram for relevant model year 2. Decals at both the integrated relay box and fusebox in
the car 3. Pocket data book 4. Owner's Manual.
Relay / fuse
- Ignition off
- Remove the cover from the fusebox
- Remove the relay / fuse.
Retainer
Page 1024
Connector B
Page 1299
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Trouble-Shooting Information
Trouble-shooting information
Condition
- No SWM diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the CEM
- No diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the SWM.
Possible source
- Defective indicator switch
- Defective control unit.
Fault symptom[s]
- Parking heater does not work.
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Was the status of the read and reset button correct?
Yes - No Fault Found
No - Replacing the component
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing the component
Replace the turn signal lamp switch
Other information:
- To replace the turn signal lamp switch, see Turn signal switch, replacing, M58, M66, M66 AWD,
AW50/51 AWD, AW55-50/51SN, M56 See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting
and Horns/Turn Signal Switch/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Switch, Replacing.
Select "Continue" when the fault has been remedied.
Continue - Checking components
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
Fuse/Relay Identification and Location
Fuses in the Engine Compartment
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 209
2/34 Fog Light Relay
2/35 Starter Motor Relay
2/49 Relay, Rear Fog Light
2/52 Relay, 15l Feed, Rear
2/59 Unlocking Relay, Fuel Filler Flap

Page 749
- Remove the Rear Electronic Module (REM) by opening the lock (1) on the top of the unit. Tip the
unit forward and lift it out of the mountings (2).
- Press in the catch on the rear brown connector in the fuse holder in the cargo compartment, turn
the lock arm up as far as it will go and pull out the connector.
- Carefully prise apart the sides of the connector holder in the ends so that the connector can pass
by the retaining hooks.
- Pull out the connector.

Page 1007
Alternatively use tool 951 2852 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2852
Terminal Removal Tool as illustrated.
Installation
Primary lock
the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable,
The secondary lock
Finishing work
Install the relays.
Note! Take care with the positioning.
Install the relevant relay box.
Splicing the Cables

Splicing the cables
Strip the wire
Peel 5.0mm / 0.2 in of the insulation off the 4 cable ends (13/64 inches) using pliers951 2620
Stripping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2620 Stripping Tool.
Page 553
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 392
Page 451
Cut off the tie strap holding the cable section to the control module. Remove the control module.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Hint: Slacken off the uppermost nut. Leave it in place, screwed in a few turns.
Pull the control module from the mounting. Position a screwdriver between the control module
connector and its locking handle (as illustrated). Turn the screwdriver to release the catch.
Continue pulling the locking handle outwards until the connector comes away from the control
module.
Installing the control module for the engine coolant heater
Install the switch by pressing in the lock handle. Position the control module. Tighten the nuts
(2xM6). Tighten to 2 Nm.
Final check
Page 1178
Fault-tracing information
Condition
- No PHM DTCs are stored in the Central electronic module (CEM).
- No DTCs are stored in the Steering wheel module (SWM).
Possible source
- Open-circuit, short-circuit to supply voltage or short-circuit to ground in the cable.
- Faulty contact reel.
Fault symptom[s]
- Steering wheel keypads does not work
Checking the Contact Reel
Checking the contact reel
Checking components and wiring
Disconnect the contact reel from the steering wheel module (SWM). Take resistance readings
between terminals #B1 and #B2. The resistance must be infinite. Take resistance readings
between terminals #B2 and #B3. The resistance must be infinite. Check the cable between terminal
#B1 and contact reel terminal #1. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B2
and contact reel terminal #2. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B3 and
contact reel terminal #3. Check for an open-circuit. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- For information about signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Parameters/Signal Specification, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and
Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To access or replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing
- Checking wiring and terminals See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring And Terminals.
Page 960
Tool or951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal
Note! Wheel sensor cables are twisted pair (positive and negative signal) cables for each wheel. It
is important that paired cables are twinned in the same way when they are reinstalled in the
connector. The cables must be twisted approximately 3 times per 100 mm.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Control Module for Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), Repair
Connector control module for Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 674
- Remove the retaining clip from the connector using a screwdriver
- Disconnect the connector by releasing the catches at the front edge using pliers. Pry out the
connector using a screwdriver
- Lift out the connector with the protection underneath and put it to one side.
Holder for the connector

Page 409
Disconnect the battery negative cable. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting.
Removal
Caution! Disconnect and work with only one cable at a time to minimize the risk of mixing them up.
Page 203
Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications Signal Specification, Brake Control Module (BCM)
With STC/TRACS
Signal specification, Brake Control Module (BCM) with STC (stability and traction control) / TRACS
(traction control system)
All values given are between the relevant terminal in column 1 and terminal # A16 or # A47
(ground), unless otherwise indicated in brackets. Terminals 6, 8-10, 12-14, 17-31, 35, 38-41 and 44
are not used.
Part 1 Of 2
Page 183
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
Control module, sun roof, replacing
The illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or models.
Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Preparations
Close the sun roof. Ignition off.
Remove the key.

Note! After removing the key, wait one minute before starting work.
Removing the sun roof control module

Page 284
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1066
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1011
Clamp the shrink tubing tightly.
Press the handles of the pliers fully together to obtain a correct joint, the pliers automatically
release their grip afterwards.
Page 225
3/131 Switch, Audio/mobile Phone
3/135 RTI Switch
3/155 Automatic Transmission Program Selector

Page 785
Removal
- Remove the lens.
- Remove the 2 screws at the front edge.
- Press the 2 rear catches forward.
- Press two of the catches on one side inwards. Remove the bulb holder.
- Disconnect the 2 connectors.
- Disconnect the ground lead.
Hint: Only certain versions of the upper electronic module (UEM) have a ground lead.
Page 1250
- Check that the control module's voltage feed and ground connection are trouble-free.
Caution! Model year 99- and control modules on the CAN-network. If none of the above checks
help, try reading out diagnostic trouble codes in the driver information module (DIM). Done via
VIDA vehicle communication. A prerequisite for being able to communicate with the control
modules in the vehicle is that the driver information module (DIM) is active and can be
communicated with. If communication is not possible with the driver information module (DIM),
check the voltage feed and ground for the control module.
VCT2000 and cable harness
- Connect VCT2000 to the vehicle so that it is supplied with voltage. Test VCT2000 by selecting the
system's self-test and VCT Test in the VIDA main menu. If any malfunction is found according to
the test, first replace the cable harness then the VCT2000, if the test still indicates a malfunction.
- If no malfunctions were found after troubleshooting according to above, try with a new cable
harness and/or new VCT2000.
VIDA
- If no malfunctions were found after troubleshooting according to above, try performing a complete
system reset of VIDA.
Other information
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring And Terminals
Page 748
- Remove the three screws (1) from the right-hand floor support
- Remove the floor support.
- Take the wiring harness (1) from the kit and position it along the tailgate sill panel with the black
connector to the right.
- Carefully pull the tailgate sill panel upward at the left-hand corner until there is an audible click
and the clips release.
- Lift the panel and insert the wiring harness into the gap between the floor support (2) and the
panel.
- Insert the cable as far under the panel as possible. Ensure that the cable is not trapped
- Also insert the cable under the sill panel on the right side and then out to the rear edge of the
wheel housing.
- Take four cable ties (2) from the kit and secure the wiring harness to the existing wiring harness
as illustrated.
- Press the sill panel into place.
- Reinstall the screws in the panel. Tighten.

Page 1280
Did read-out of status on audio/telephone switch unit give a correct result?
No - Vehicle equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Vehicle equipment
Is the vehicle equipped with RTI?
Yes - Checking the wires and components
No - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the wires and components

Page 1323
Did read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch give a correct result?
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the windscreen-wiper switch
Additional information:
- To replace windscreen-wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair.
Press Continue when fault has been repaired.
Continue - Checking the components
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the components
Activate windscreen-wiper switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault was in the
windscreen-wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Test by replacing the control unit.
Caution! A new control unit is supplied without software. The new control unit must be programmed
before it will work.
- To replace and program the control unit, see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See:
Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair.
Page 1013
When the first join is completed and checked, join the rest of the wire ends in the same way.
Heating the shrink tubing
The shrink tubing ensures the electric wire is satisfactory and provides a safe join. Hold a pad or
other item behind the shrink tubing to avoid heat escaping.
Hint: Suitable setting of heat gun951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2777 Hot-Air
Gun , air distribution switch in position 2 and potentiometer for temperature setting in position
between 2 and 3.
Heat the sleeve using the hot air gun951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2777
Hot-Air Gun and suitable jet kit. Heat the shrink tubing rapidly to avoid heat escaping. It is very
important that the shrink tubing is correctly shrunk around the wire. It should be tight at both ends.
Note! Adjust the heat shield if necessary.
Joining the Cables
Joining the cables

Connecting
see information about SRS cables: Refer to: Cable harness SRS system, repair See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures
Perform battery disconnection. Refer to: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting
see information about cable terminals surface treatment. Refer to: Cable terminals surface
treatment See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Cable
Terminals Surface Treatment
Page 261
9/16-17 LH And RH Backrest Heating Element
9/16-17 LH/RH Backrest Heating Element
10/18-19 Lamp Housing, LH/RH Tail Light
9/18-19 LH And RH Seat Heating Element

Page 1349
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to
Page 494
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1020
. Test the function.
Page 867
8/71-74 Throttle Solenoid, Shift Solenoid 3, 4, 5
8/71-74 Throttle Solenoid, Shift Solenoid 3, 4 And 5

Page 465
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Dashboard Environment Panel (Including Climate
Control Module), Replacing
Dashboard Environment Panel (including Climate Control Module (CCM)), Replacing
Preparations
NOTE: Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. This is carried
out via VADIS communication. After replacing the control module, the relevant parameters must be
programmed into the new control module.
Replacing dashboard environment panel

- Ignition off.
- Remove the key.
NOTE: -
The key must be removed to ensure that the ignition is not switched on by mistake.
- After the key has been removed: Wait 3 minutes before starting work.
Steering System Components
Steering Column Control Module: Locations Steering System Components
Location Of Components
- SWM control unit (1).
- Cruise control switch unit (2).
- Radio/telephone switch unit (3).
- Indicator switch (4).
- Wiper switch (5).
- RTI switch unit (6).

Page 1239
------------------------
Checking communication errors, car model V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90
Different speed on the CAN-communication can lead to problems
Volvo's vehicles have different speed of communication on the high-speed part of the CAN-network
(HS-CAN), depending on model year.
- Model year -2004 communicates with 250 kbit/s.
- Model year 2005- communicates with 500 kbit/s.
Due to this, it is very important to specify correct vehicle profile before any communication is
started with the vehicle's HS-CAN. This is normally done by pressing on " Retrieve VIN" or by
manually specifying vehicle parameters under "Vehicle profile". If the wrong model year has been
selected, it may lead to blocking of the CAN-net, diagnostic trouble codes being stored in several
control modules or missing response from control modules at continued communication. The
following control modules may be affected by this problem:
- Brake control module (BCM)/(ABS)

- Engine control module (ECM)
- Electronic Throttle Module (ETM)
- Suspension Module (SUM)
- Central electronic module (CEM)
- Transmission control module (TCM)
- Steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS)
- Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS)
If this happens, take the following action:
- Turn off the ignition and remove the ignition key. Insert the key again in position II.
- If the above does not work, remove the battery cable and connect it again after a minute to reset
the control modules.
- Select the correct vehicle profile in VIDA and erase the diagnostic trouble codes. Check that the
symptoms have disappeared.
Diagnostic outlet
Communication cables
- Check the communication cable (k-line) between diagnostic outlet #7 and central electronic
module (CEM) #D6 and other connected control modules for open circuit, short-circuit to ground
and short-circuit to voltage.
Caution! In case of malfunction on this communication cable, communication cannot be established

on either the low or high-speed
Page 1342
The value indicates the voltage at the steering wheel module.
Distance, value
Measurement range: 0-1048575 km The value indicates the total mileage of the car at the time the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Passenger compartment temperature, value
Measurement range: -60 to +195 °C The value indicates the passenger compartment temperature
at the time the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Outside temperature, value
Measurement range: -128 to +127.75 °C The value indicates the outside temperature at the time
the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Engine running, status
The status displays whether the engine was running when the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was
stored. Yes = the engine was running No = the engine was not running
Time, value
The value displays the time that has passed since the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Reading Off Detailed Diagnostic Data
Reading off detailed diagnostic data
General information about reading off

Locations
2/62 Relay, Low Beam/Bi-Xenon

Page 643
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1158
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
- Defective windscreen-wiper switch

Fault symptom[s]
- Front windscreen washer does not work.
Checking the Windshield Washing

Page 485
- driver information control unit.
Disconnect contacts.
- lock and alarm receiver.
Installation of driver information control unit
Install in reverse order.
Ordering software
Order applicable software.
Programming the control unit
After the control module has been replaced, the customer parameters should be programmed in
again. Finish off by checking that no diagnostic trouble codes have been displayed when replacing.
Both programming of the control module and reading the diagnostic trouble codes can be found in
VIDA vehicle communication.
Page 1330
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected
- Switch off all equipment that takes power from the battery (courtesy lighting, radio etc).
Connect an ohmmeter between terminal #16 on the breakout box and the battery negative
terminal. To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and
Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM).
Page 132
3/127 Control Module FR Door PDM/DDM

Page 1359
Communication cable for engine management system Fenix 5.1 and diesel (not Lucas)
- Check the communication cables between diagnostic outlet #11/#15 and engine control module
(ECM) for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 917
31/66 Ground Connection

Page 995
the seal is correctly positioned and that the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on
the cable.
Sealed Connector Type 3
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool.
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 174
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Control module heater pad, replacing
Removing the heater pad control module
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Remove one screw. Disconnect the
connector. Remove the control module.
Installing the heater pad control module
Install:
- the connector
- one screw
- the seat. See Removing power seats, tilting See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Page 1366
------------------------
Checking communication errors, car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70/C70
Diagnostic outlet
- Check the communication cable (k-line) between diagnostic outlet #7 and the driver information
module (DIM) #B4 and other connected control modules for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and
short-circuit to voltage.
on the high-speed network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the high-speed
cables between the diagnostic outlet and driver information module (DIM) are connected to the
high-speed network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the driver information module
(DIM).
- Check communication cables between diagnostic outlet #6/#14 and the driver information module
(DIM) #A19/#A20 for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to
references above.
- Also check the communication cables for thehigh-speed networkbetween the driver information
module (DIM) and the other connected control modules according to troubleshooting above.
Communication cable for engine management system Fenix 5.2
- Check the communication cable between diagnostic outlet #3 and engine control module (ECM)
for open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
Control modules
Page 716
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Accessory Electronic Module With Wiring Kit
Accessory electronic module with wiring kit

Page 1247
Diagnostic outlet
- For communication problems with control units onthe high-speed network, check communication
cables between diagnostic outlet #6/ #14 and central electronic module (CEM) #B11/ #B12 for
open circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
- For communication problems with control units onthe low-speed network, check communication
cables between diagnostic outlet #3/#11 and central electronic module (CEM) #B16/#B15 for open
circuit, short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to voltage according to references above.
- Also check the communication cables for the low and high-speed net between the central
electronic module (CEM) and the other connected control modules according to troubleshooting
above.
Control modules
Caution! If none of the above checks help, try reading out diagnostic trouble codes in the central
electronic module (CEM). Done via VIDA vehicle communication. A prerequisite for being able to
communicate with the control modules in the vehicle is that the central electronic module (CEM) is
active and can be communicated with. If communication is not possible with the central electronic
module (CEM), check the voltage feed and ground for the central electronic module (CEM).
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
the vehicle or in VIDA/VCT/cable harness. If the
Page 527
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 654
- Remove the retaining clip from the connector using a screwdriver
- Disconnect the connector by releasing the catches at the front edge using pliers. Pry out the
connector using a screwdriver
- Lift out the connector with the protection underneath and put it to one side.
Holder for the connector

Page 1143
Page 1165
Checking SWM control unit
Before continuing with trouble-shooting it is important to take note of the following:
- All tests for the current system should have been done.
- No faults should be found in the components, connectors or wires etc.
Have all the tests been done without finding any faults?
Yes - Replacing the component
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1222
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Checking the Ground Terminal for the Steering Wheel Module
Checking the ground terminal for the steering wheel module
Checking the ground terminal

Page 156
- Remove the control module connector cover.
- Flip the anti-dazzle button toward the lens. Disconnect the connector in the control module by
pressing the catch through the opening. Use a screwdriver
Page 1008
Twist the strands on the stripped wire ends. Do NOT forget to do this on all four wire ends.
Note! Make sure the strands are twisted.
Joining the wire ends with the same colors/ single or multi-colored
Page 940
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics For Aftersales)
VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales)
During the second half of 2004, VADIS (Volvo Aftersales Diagnostic and Information System) was
phased out and replaced by VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales). The purpose
of VIDA is to support service providers in repairing and servicing Volvo vehicles. VIDA provides
Service and Parts information, as well as diagnostic fault tracing, and software downloads. As in
VADIS, these areas are integrated into one single application. All functionality that could be found in
VADIS will be found in VIDA. However, in some particular areas, e.g., the diagnostic work flow,
search functionality, and the Parts catalogue, VIDA contains considerable enhancements when
compared to VADIS.
Volvo's VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales) system ties together service and
repair data, parts data, service bulletins, software (firmware) downloads, fault tracing and on-board
diagnostic as well as other related information to decrease service time.
Much of the diagnostic information provided here is presented in a manner that assumes the
technician is using the web-based Volvo diagnostic system (VIDA) to diagnose the vehicle. Volvo
does not provide any information based on performing diagnosis with a third party diagnostic tool
aside from a conversion from P Codes to Volvo ECM Codes. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Conversion Table Standardized Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)/Volvo Diagnostic
Trouble Codes
Check Terminals Visually
Cleaning female socket terminals and male pin terminals Greasing female terminals
Check terminals visually
NOTE: When checking the engine control module (ECM), do not remove the control module from
the car before the main relay has interrupted the power supply. This may take up to 4 minutes after
the ignition has been switched off and the engine cooling fan (FC) has stopped running.
Inspect the terminals visually when checking, or taking readings from, opened connectors.
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Check for oxidation. This can cause poor connections in the terminals
- Check for damage to pins and terminals. Check that they are properly inserted into the connector.
Check that the cable is properly connected to the pin or terminal. Check pins and terminals
particularly carefully
- Use a separate male terminal to check the female terminal. Check that they are secure. Pull on
the pin.
Contact Resistance and Oxidation
Contact resistance and oxidation

Page 16
The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the audio module (AUM).
The signal types are divided into directly connected signals and Controller area network (CAN)
communication. The illustration below displays the same information with the Volvo component
designations.
Page 1319
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the tailgate wiper. Read off the status.
Hint: If the tailgate wiper switch status is OK the fault is in the tailgate wiper.
Was the tailgate wiper status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Try replacing the steering wheel module (SWM).
Caution! A new control module is delivered without software. The control module must be
programmed in order to function after replacement.
Other information:
- For replacing and programming and replacing the control module: Steering wheel module (SWM),
replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 441
- Install the cable in the holder for the control module. Press the connector into place.
- Reinstall the control module. Press the module into place until there is an audible click.
Ordering software Order software
Programming the steering wheel angle sensor module (SAS) Program the new control module
The soundproofing panel Install the driver's side soundproofing panel.

Page 714
Note! Make a note of the position number of the connector. These are located on the ends of the
connector and in the bottom of the fuse holder.
- Connect the green (GN) cable to position 19 in the connector. Connect the white (W) cable to
position 30.
- Reinstall the connector in the holder
- Reinstall the connector in the fuse holder.
- Refit the Rear Electronic Module (REM).
- Fit fuse 15A from the kit in position 3 on the fuse holder.
- Tighten the bracket of the accessory electronic module in the rear right hole for the floor support
parallel to the side member as illustrated. On newer cars, there is a foam rubber block on the
right-hand side member. This is to be kept in place and is compressed when the bracket is fitted in
place.
- Drill a -4 mm (5/32") hole in the side member, through the front hole in the bracket.
- Remove the screw and the bracket
- Remove any swarf.
- Treat the edges of the holes using a rust-proofing agent.

Page 355
Slide the catch in the direction of the arrow, as illustrated.
Connector Data Link Connector (DLC), Repair
Connector data link connector (DLC), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Data link connector (DLC), dismantling
Expose the data link connector (DLC).
Secondary lock
Page 680
Remove all relays and shunts bridged to the control module. Note the locations.
Release the catch on the rear. Use a screwdriver. Lift and pull out the control module.
Check
Check that the control module's connectors are intact.
- Press the control module into place so that the catch on the rear engages
- Position the connector. Carefully press the connector down.
Note! The pins are fragile. Check that the connector goes straight down into the control module.
- Tighten the screw for the connector
- Check that the connector cover is correctly positioned. Remedy if necessary
- Install the relays and shunts. Note their locations
- Install the integrated relay / fusebox. See Installing the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
Ordering software
Integrated Relay/Fusebox, Engine Compartment, Replacing
Integrated relay / fusebox in engine compartment
Exposing
Page 394
- Take out the screw, washer, nut and bracket from the kit.
- Place the bracket over the drilled hole with the text (1) facing backwards. Mark out to cut off the
corner of the bumper cover as illustrated.
- Cut off the corner.
- Fit the bracket (with the text (1) facing backwards), with the screw, washer and nut. Do not tighten
the bracket yet.
- Place the connector on the bracket as illustrated.
- Adjust the position of the bracket with the connector and tighten the screw/nut correctly.
Connector Relay Box, Repair
Connector relay box, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Preparatory work
Page 717
- Turn the ignition key to position 0
- Cars with manual gearboxes: Remove the ignition key

- Disconnect the battery negative lead.
Note! Wait at least five minutes before disassembling the connectors or removing other electrical
equipment.
Illustration A applies to the S60 and the S80
- Remove the seat cushion (1). First pull the front edge of the seat cushion up. Pull the cushion
forwards. Then lift the seat cushion out.
Illustration B applies to the V70 (00-)

Page 846
6/67 Pump, Fuel Leakage Control
6/69 Damper Motor, Ventilation/Floor/Defroster
6/71 Stepper Motor, Speed-dependent Power Steering
6/92-93 Motor, RL And RR Power Window

Page 328
Combined these give a component designation, for example, 3/2.
There is a list of components, where, with the help of the component designation, you can read off
the name of the component, for example, 3/2 = light switch. See: Diagrams/Diagram Information
and Instructions/Diagram Legend
List of type numbers
The list shows which type of component that respective type numbers refer to, for example, 3/x =
switch, 6/x = electric motor, etc.
1 Battery
2 Relay
3 Switch
4 Control module
5 Combined instrument panel
6 Electric motor
7 Sensor
8 Actuator
9 Heating element
10 Light
11 Fuse
15 Distribution rail
16 Audio
17 Service/diagnostics
18 Contact reel
19 Meter
20 Ignition component/shunt
31 Ground connection
53 Junction point
54 Connector
B. Junction points
The wiring diagrams contain numbered junction points, e.g. 53/352.
This information contains a section with a list of junction points. This list shows all the components
that are connected to each junction point. See: Power and Ground Distribution/Branching
Point/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
The location of the junction points is shown in the "Cable harness routing in vehicle". See:
Locations/Harness Locations
C. Connectors
Connectors provide a bridge between two cables harnesses and are described in the "Connectors
Views". See: Diagrams/Connector Views
D. Electrical distribution
Operation of the fuses and relays is shown in the "Electrical distribution". See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
E. Data communication
Today's cars are equipped with a CAN network, which transmits information. Connections to this
network are shown in their entirety on the respective wiring diagrams. Complete information on
CAN communication is can be found in the section titled "Data communication". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
F. Abbreviations
A number of different abbreviations are used in this information. These are explained in the section
"Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations". See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and
Instructions/Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations
G. Component location
The appearance and location of components is described in alphabetical order at the Vehicle Level
component locations "A - Z Component List". See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z
Component List
Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations

Page 1126
Steering Column Control Module: Description and Operation Diagnostic Functions
General
General
The control module has a built-in diagnostic system, Volvo Diagnostic, which continuously monitors
internal functions as well as input and output signals.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCS)
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module detects a fault. 35 diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) can be stored. A fault which is detected in the most recent operating cycle is defined
as permanent. Other faults which are detected are defined as intermittent.
Reading and Erasing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCS)
Reading And Erasing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
Stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be read off and erased using this function.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased once all the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
have been read off at least once.
Reading Off Input and Output Signals
Reading Off Input And Output Signals
This function can be used to continuously read off the status of the control module's input and
output signals.
Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information
Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information
This function can be used to read parameters, status identifiers and counters stored at the same
time as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). These are called frozen values.
Reading the Control Module Identification
Reading The Control Module Identification
VADIS identifies control modules by reading off a number of codes from the control module
memory.
The codes contain the following information about the control module:
- hardware P/N (control module without software).
- hardware serial number (control module without software).
- software P/N.
- diagnostic software P/N.
Downloading Software and Replacing the Control Module
Downloading Software And Replacing The Control Module
New software can be downloaded into the steering wheel module (SWM). When ordering software,
the hardware and the software in the car is compared to the data in the Volvo central database. If
the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module.
If the comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated
with the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded.
The control module is integrated in the steering wheel bracket. The steering wheel must be
removed to replace the control module.
Page 1200
Was the status of the cruise control switch OK?
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking components and wiring
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the audio / carphone wiring by disconnecting the lower connector on the cruise control
switch
- Ignition on.
Activate the buttons. Read off the status of the buttons in the cruise control switch If the readings
give a correct result, the fault is in the wiring between the audio / carphone switch and the cruise
control switch.
Other information:
- To access the cruise control switch, see the relevant service procedure.
Page 884
11B/11-23
11 C/no. Fuses In Passenger Compartment

Page 745
- Press the control module onto the bracket by the side member
- Plug in the connectors of the cargo compartment lighting and refit the sill panel.
- Turn the ignition key to position II.
- Reconnect the battery negative lead
- Reposition the folding panels and refit the cargo compartment carpet.
- Program the software according to the service information in VIDA.
Applies to the V70
- Turn the ignition switch to position 0.
equipment.
Page 55
Before taking any readings, see Checking the ground terminals See: Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Checking Ground Terminal.
Audio control module (cable between the audio module and the CD changer/navigation unit)
External amplifier
10CD changer
Page 272
10/149 RH Rearview Mirror Lighting
10/150 Rear Reading Light
10/43,50 RH And LH Brake Light
10/46,53 Fog Light, Right And Left Rear
10/47,54 RR And RL Direction Indicator

Page 829
3/80 Switch, LH Central Lock
3/82 Switch, RH Central Lock
3/85-86 RL/RR Door Power Window Switch
3/85 RL/RR Door Power Window Switch

Recall 04V051000: Rear Brake Lamp Relay Malfunction
Brake Lamp Relay: Recalls Recall 04V051000: Rear Brake Lamp Relay Malfunction
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles, the rear left and right brake light relays may not function
when the brake pedal is depressed or may stay on continuously. If the brake lights fail to come on,
there will be no lower brake lights to indicate to following vehicles that the vehicle is decelerating,
which could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light relay with two relays of a modified design. The
manufacturer has reported that owner notification began on Feb. 23, 2004 . Owners may contact
Volvo at 1-800-458-1552.
Page 1182
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the audio / carphone switch by disconnecting the lower connector on the audio /
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
give a correct result, the fault is in the audio / carphone switch.
Other information:
- To access the audio / carphone switch, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Sensor Module DSTC
7/164 Sensor Module DSTC

Page 1462
1. Pressure plate 2. Rollers for the annular piston 3. Rollers for the operating piston 4. Annular
piston 5. Operating piston 6. Input shaft 7. Cam disc 8. Housing for the outer plates 9. Outer plates
10. Inner plates 11. Springs 12. Output shaft.
The transmission transfers engine torque to the propeller shaft. The input shaft is separate from the
output shaft. The multi-plate clutch in the coupling must be engaged to transfer torque to the rear
axle. The inner and outer wet multi-plate clutch are the transfer point between the input and output
shafts. The sinusoidal cam disc rotates at the same speed as the propeller shaft. The annular
piston rollers act on the cam disc to press the annular piston in and out. This creates an oil
pressure which affects the operating piston, which in term engages the multi-plate clutch unit.
Hydraulic function, overview

Page 613
Cargo Compartment Relays, RMA1 - RSH6

Page 1180
Checking the Cruise Control Switch
Checking the cruise control switch
Ignition off. Ignition on. Read off the status of the buttons in the cruise control switch. If the cruise
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module (SWM).
Is the cruise control switch working?
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
Is the car equipped with RTI?
Yes - Checking components and wiring
-------------------------------------------------

Locations
Fuel Door Release Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 981
Note! tool 951 2852 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2852 Terminal Removal
Tool can only be used for socket housings.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 5
Connector door, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 656
Remove:
- the screw from the rear edge
- front edge from the hook on the member and remove the base section.
Installation
- Position the bottom section and the air intake on the air pipe at the windshield washer fluid filler
pipe.
Page 155
Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair Upper Electronic Module (UEM)/Rear View
Mirror, Replacing
Replacing The Upper Electronic Module (UEM), Or The Rear View Mirror
Preparations
NOTE: Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. Program this
data back into the new control module.
Programmed data is read off via VADIS vehicle communication.
CAUTION: New software can only be ordered after the control module has been installed in the
car. VADIS reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct
software.
Always check the control module and connector on the control module box for bent or damaged
pins or sockets. This may have caused the fault.

- Remove the lens
- Remove the 2 screws at the front edge
- Press the 2 rear catches forward
- Press two of the catches on one side inwards. Remove the bulb holder
- Disconnect the 2 connectors
HINT: Only certain versions of the upper electronic module (UEM) have a ground lead.
Page 327
A. Component designation
Every component has a component designation that consists of two parts.
The first part is a type number that describes the type of component in question, for example 3/xx.
The second part of the designation is a serial number, for example, x/2.
Page 463
Removal
- Release the catches. Pull off the panel
- The panel has double-sided adhesive tape. Ensure that any remains of the tape are removed
from the black panel.
Installation
- Remove the backing from the tape on the panel and press the panel into place.
Ordering software
Finishing
After replacing the control module, the following must be carried out.
- Reprogram the customer programmed data
- Carry out self-adjustment of the damper motor end positions
- Test drive the car. Check that the function of the climate control system is OK
- Then check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the replacement.
Information about programming the control module, damper motor self-adjustment and reading off
diagnostic trouble codes can be found under VIDA vehicle communication.
Dashboard environment panel switches

Page 965
Pull the secondary lock out to the side. Use an electrician's screwdriver, as illustrated.
Use tool 951 2636 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2636 Terminal Removal
Tool to remove the cable terminal lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully
backwards.
Page 33
- VCT2000 disconnected from the data link connector (DLC)
- VCT2000 disconnected from the VIDA cart
- Communication problems in VIDA application or in car.
- No voltage in the data link connector (DLC).
Check therefore:
- That the control module power supply and ground terminal are fault-free.
- That the fuse for the data link connector (DLC) is intact.
- that the ignition is on
- that the battery voltage (system voltage) is normal (approximately 12 V).
If necessary a battery charger can be connected during the test. For information about charge
currents and the battery, see: Battery, charging See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Battery, Charging
- that VCT2000 is correctly connected to the VIDA cart and the data link connector (DLC)
- that VCT2000 and the wiring is fault-free.
Other information
- For information about fuse and terminal numbers, see the relevant Wiring Diagram.
Try to establish communication again or exit reading off diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Depending on the communication fault, select one of the following options.
1. Try again 2. Fault-trace more comprehensively for the communication problem that has occurred
3. Exit fault-tracing / Read off from the next system.
Which alternative is requested?
1 - radio module
2 - Checking communication faults
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication faults
Checking communication errors

Selecting car model
Select car model to obtain relevant troubleshooting information.
Select one of the following model alternatives
1. S40 (04-) / V50. 2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC
and S70 / C70. 4. S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
2 - car model V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90
3 - car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70
4 - Checking communication errors car model S40 (-04) / V40
------------------------
Checking communication errors, car model S40 (04-) / V50

Page 51
Communications Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Description of Reading Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information
Description of reading extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information
Contents
Select type of description.
- Counters, description
- Status identifier, description
Description of Parameters
Description of parameters
Signal strength
Indicates signal amplitude in the interval 0-255. To obtain corresponding dBA■µV-value, use the
following conversion table.
Due to tolerances of the units, the values in the conversion table shall be regarded as approximate.
Note! Parameters that show status of the buttons are only available for vehicles equipped with
steering wheel buttons as well as on model year 2005 and later.
The following buttons refer to the steering wheel buttons. Buttons have two possible status modes:
Off = Control module does not consider selected button pressed in. On = Control module considers
selected button pressed in.
Buttons Volume up
The value shows if the button for adjusting volume up is pressed in. Volume down
The value shows if the button for adjusting volume down is pressed in. Next up
The value shows if the button for selecting next sound track or radio station is pressed in. Next
down
The value shows if the button for selecting previous sound track or radio station is pressed in.
On-button, telephone (green telephone)
The value shows if the on-button for the telephone is pressed in. Off-button, telephone (red
telephone)
The value shows if the off-button for the telephone is pressed in.
Page 1346
------------------------

Diagnostic outlet

on either the low or high-speed
Page 685
- Disconnect the battery lead. See Battery, replacing See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery, Replacing
- Remove the battery leads from the holder
- Remove the screws from the holder.

Page 1109
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 842
6/26 Generator
6/28 Motor, Passenger Compartment Fan
6/29 Motor, Electric Cooling Fan
6/30 Washer Pump, Rear Window
6/32 Rear Window Wiper Motor

Page 28
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Locations
Parking Lamp Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 47
- Ignition off
- Main unit / audio control module disconnected.

terminal.
Page 678
Hint: The rear panel in the side panel of the cargo compartment can be removed to change fuses.
Relay and fuse location, 11D
For the location of the relays and fuses, see:
Installing the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
Align the integrated relay/fusebox in the grooves in the bracket and press into place. Install the left
side panel in the cargo compartment.
Replacing the rear electronic module (REM)
The rear electronic module (REM) is a separate unit in the relay box in the cargo compartment.
Caution! New software can only be ordered when the control module is installed in the car. VIDA
reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct software.
Release the relay and fuse box. See Exposing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo
compartment.

Page 631
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38
Fuses in the Cargo Area/Compartment

Page 1301
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
- Text message in combined instrument cannot be erased.
Checking the Read Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read button on the indicator switch
Activate read button on indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.
Did read-out of status on read button give a correct result?
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the indicator switch.
- To replace indicator switch see Turn signal switch, replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors
and Switches - Lighting and Horns/Turn Signal Switch/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Switch,
Replacing.

-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault was in the indicator switch.
Page 722
Applies to the S80
- Remove the cargo compartment carpet (1)
- Turn the clip (2) for the left and right side panels. Remove the clips and the plastic nut. Remove
the panels
- Remove the two covers (3). Slacken off the two screws (4) from under the cover. Grip the outer
edges of the panel (5). Pull the panel inwards towards the centre so that the clips release at the
sides. Disconnect the connectors (6) for the cargo compartment lamps
- Remove the panel by pulling it straight upwards so that the clips release from the rear
crossmember.
Remove:
- the clips (1) from the left front side panel in the cargo compartment
- the panel. Place the panel to one side
- repeat the operation on the other side.
Applies to the V70
- Remove both floor hatches. First lift the rear edges of the floor hatches slightly. Then pull the
hatches backwards from their mountings.
Page 1444
Carefully press the control module down into the grooves on the inside of the control module box.
Press down all the way. Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench
around the control module. Move the upper section of the tool forwards to stop and pull it up. Press
the cover into place over the control modules. Check that the air ducts are correctly positioned.
Connect the battery negative lead. First read Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Ordering software
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair.
Page 1037
Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Downloading Software And Replacing The Control Module New software can be downloaded into
the engine control module (ECM). When ordering software, the hardware and the software in the
car is compared to the information in the Volvo central database. If the comparison is OK the
software is downloaded to the control module. If the comparison between the car and Volvo central
database is not OK, the database is updated with the car configuration. When this is complete the
software is downloaded. For further information regarding downloading, see Design and Function,
Downloading Software.
The engine control module (ECM) is positioned in the cool box in the engine compartment.
The engine control module (ECM) contains a unique code for each car for the immobilizer. The
central electronic module (CEM) checks this code at engine start up. The engine will not start if the
central electronic module (CEM) detects an incorrect code for the immobilizer. This means that the
engine control module (ECM) cannot be switched from car to car.
The engine control module (ECM) must first be "unlocked" using a unique PIN for each car before it
can be programmed with a code for the immobilizer. When the engine control module (ECM) has
approved the PIN, the code for the immobilizer can be programmed.
The PIN and the code for the immobilizer are obtained from the Volvo central database and sent
out with the software package when software for downloading has been ordered.
All new engine control modules (ECM) have the same PIN which is preprogrammed by the control
module supplier. After the engine control module (ECM) has been programmed successfully the
original PIN for the car will be programmed in the engine control module (ECM) memory and
replace the preprogrammed PIN code.
Page 1382
Programming and Relearning
Downloading software and replacing the control module
New software can be downloaded into the steering wheel module (SWM). When ordering software,
the hardware and the software in the car is compared to the data in the Volvo central database. If
the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module. If the comparison between
the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated with the car configuration.
When this is complete the software is downloaded. The control module is integrated in the steering
wheel bracket. The steering wheel must be removed to replace the control module.
Page 957
Central electrical unit engine/transmission control module (ECM/TCM).
Relay box in passenger compartment/cargo compartment. See Connector relay box, repair See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connector Relay Box, Repair.
Page 20
Remote control from the key pad on the steering wheel is available as both an option and as
standard equipment depending on the market. The keypad is positioned on the right-hand side of
the steering wheel and is connected to the steering wheel module (SWM) via serial communication.
It is possible to control the volume (increase-decrease) and change the preprogrammed radio
stations via the keypad. The buttons are used to select a track when playing a CD, cassette or
Mini-Disk. The steering wheel module (SWM) communicates with the audio module (AUM) via the
Controller area network (CAN).
Audio remote control (option)
Remote operation from a separate wireless remote control is available as an option. This can be
used to control the volume (increase-decrease) and change the preset radio stations. The buttons
are used to select tracks when playing a CD, cassette or Mini-Disk and to change the CD when
using the CD changer. A particular frequency can be searched for, radio stations stored in the
presets, Autostores made and sources stored. The remote control is fitted with two AAA (LR03)
batteries.
Road Traffic Information system (RTI) (option)
See Design and Function, Road Traffic Information system, RTI (road traffic information).
TV-receiver (option)
See Design and Function, Road Traffic Information system, RTI (road traffic information).
Page 623
2/30 X Feed Overload Relay
2/31 15-Feed Overload Relay

Page 735
- Check that the connector cover is correctly positioned. Remedy if necessary.
- Install relays and shunts.
- Install the relay box.
- Install the soundproofing panel on the driver's side.
Ordering and programming software
Order and program software following the table below.
Finishing
- Program in the data read off from the old control module (customer-programmed data for
example). This is performed via VIDA vehicle communication.
- Reset the service reminder indicator (SRI). Otherwise the lamp will receive incorrect reference
data. (Global time is reset when the central electronic module (CEM) is replaced.) Reset the
service reminder indicator (SRI) according to Resetting the service reminder indicator (SRI) See:
Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator/Service
and Repair
- Check that the control area network (CAN) is functioning. This is done by reading off the control
module ID for the central electronic module (CEM), rear electronic module (REM) and engine
control module (ECM) via VIDA vehicle communication.
Other information
For the location of other relay and fuse boxes, see Relays, fuse boxes and wiring See: Power and
Ground Distribution/Locations
Page 679
Unscrew the screw holding the connector so that it is free of its threads. Check that the screw is
free with your fingers. Disconnect the connector. Use an open spanner and a support. See the
illustration.
Note! Do not damage the pins. Always check that the control module's and control module box's
connectors do not have bent or damaged pins or sleeves. This may have be the cause of the
problem.
Page 382
Release the inner housing section on the socket housing by lifting the sleeve beside the catch and
pulling the housing section outwards. Disconnect the cable terminals. Use tool 951 2812 Terminal
removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal Removal Tool or951 2637 Terminal
removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal Removal Tool , as illustrated. At the
same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Slide the receptacle housing into the connector. Press the secondary lock into place.
Connector sealed, repair

Removal Tool.
correct.
The connector has no secondary lock.
Primary lock
Page 1283
- Ignition off.
- Disconnect cable to audio/telephone by loosening the lower connector on the cruise-control
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Activate buttons and read status on cruise-control switch unit buttons. If read-out gave a correct
result the fault is in the cable between the audio/telephone switch unit and cruise-control switch
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Did read-out of status on cruise-control switch unit give a correct result?
Yes - Fault Found
no - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 883
11B/1-10
Locations
3/117 Dome Light Control Module

Page 968
Press in the locking tab on the cable terminal and carefully pull out the cable and the cable
terminal. Use tool 951 2812 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal
Removal Tool or tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637
Terminal Removal Tool , as illustrated.
Primary locking
Secondary locking
Connector Type 1
Connectors, repair
Special tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal
Removal Tool.
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1287
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module (SWM).
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------

Page 294
16/47 GPS Antenna RTI
16/50, 54 LH/RH Rear Window Antenna
16/55-56 LH/RH Front Tweeter
16/55-56 LH And RH Front Tweeter

Page 1365
Diagnostic outlet

on either the low or high-speed network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the
low and high-speed cables between the diagnostic outlet and central electronic module (CEM) are
connected to the rest of the network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the central
electronic module (CEM). This relay is only found on vehicles of model year -2004.
cables between diagnostic outlet #6/ #14 and central electronic module (CEM) #B7/ #B8 for open
above.
Control modules
communicate with the control modules in the car is that the central electronic module (CEM) is
VIDA
Other information
Page 1099
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Supplemental restraint system module (SRS), replacing
Removal
Preparations
Disconnect the battery lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
SRS control module
V70R (B5254T4 engine)
Remove the front storage compartment. See Center console, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing.
V70 (other engines)
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (-2004) or
the entire center console. See Center console, replacing See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (2005-).
V70XC/XC70
Remove the front storage compartment - see Center console, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (-2004) - or
the entire center console - see Center console, replacing See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing (2005-).
S80
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Center Console, Replacing.
Page 1130
Page 306
31/1-98 Ground Connection

Page 1150
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------

Page 688
- Remove the cover from the fusebox.
- Remove the holder. See Retainer
- Disconnect the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- Cut off the triple clamps for the battery leads.

Page 302

Page 1370
------------------------
FAULT FOUND - Fault-tracing information
-------------------------------------------------
Fault-tracing communication problems is now finished.
Do you want to try establishing communication again?
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - digital display

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 281
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 366
Secondary lock
Fold up the secondary lock. If necessary use an electrician's screwdriver.
Primary lock
Page 349
Fuse holder in passenger compartment/cargo compartment. See Connector fuse holder, repair
See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connector Fuse Holder, Repair.
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), Repair
Page 1021
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Connector A
Page 1294
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1131
Steering Column Control Module: Service and Repair
Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing
Removal
Steering wheel module (SWM)
Remove the steering wheel. See Steering wheel module See: Steering Mounted Controls
Communication Module/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Module. Remove the steering column
covers. See Replacing the steering column covers, B5244T5, B5254T2 See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Steering Column Cover/Service and Repair
Remove:
- 2 screws
- the connectors
- the control module with stalks and the contact reel by releasing the catches on the underside
- The windscreen wiper and indicator lamp stalks. See Washer / wiper switch, replacing, B5244T5,
B5254T2 See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Switch/Service and Repair and Turn signal switch, replacing, M58, M66, M66 AWD, AW50/51
AWD, AW55-50/51SN, M56 See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
Horns/Turn Signal Switch/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Switch, Replacing
- the contact reel according to Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing
The control module is now exposed.
Installation
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Programming the control module
Program the control module. See the table below:
Note! Vehicles from model year 2004 mist be loaded with software for the Steering wheel module
(SWM). Vehicles from model year 2005 shall only be loaded with software for the Steering Angle
Sensor Module (SAS) if the vehicle is equipped with DSTC.
Page 150
- Remove the cover over the connector for the rear view mirror and control module.
- Flip the anti-dazzle button toward the lens. Disconnect the connector in the rear view mirror and
control module by pressing the catch through the
Page 1341
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) up button is depressed. Not activated
Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) down button, status
This value indicates whether the RTI down button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) enter button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) enter button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) reset button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) reset button is depressed. Not
activated Activated
Windscreen washer, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the washer position. Not
activated Activated
High speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the high speed position. Not
activated Activated
Low speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the low speed position. Not
activated Activated
Intermittent position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the intermittent position. Not
activated Activated
Single sweep position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the single sweep position.
Not activated Activated
Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description
Frozen values steering wheel module, description
Explanation
Not all the parameters described need to be implemented in the control module. This varies from
system to system. Frozen values are parameter values that are stored when a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) is stored.
Battery voltage, value
Measurement range: 0-28.4 V Normal value when the generator (GEN) is charging: 13.0-14.5 V
Page 1309
Was a fault detected?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the RTI Switch Unit
Checking the RTI switch unit

Page 180
- Design See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Description
and Operation/Design
- Function See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof /
Moonroof/Description and Operation/Function
Page 557
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 660
illustration.
problem.
Page 320
54/10 Connector
54/11 Connector
54/12 Connector
54/13 Connector
54/14 Connector
Page 387
Adjust the lock pins using an electrician's screwdriver and press up the secondary lock, as
illustrated.
The primary lock
Tool to press down the cable terminal locking tab, as
Page 1034
Page 1325
Was the wiper switch status OK?
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the wiper switch
Other information:
- To replace the wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing, B5244T5, B5254T2 See:
Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the windshield wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: The fault is in the windshield wiper switch if the windshield wiper switch status is OK.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- To replace and program the steering wheel module (SWM), see Steering wheel module (SWM),
replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair.
Page 402
Clamp the shrink tubing tightly.
Press the handles of the pliers fully together to obtain a correct joint, the pliers automatically
release their grip afterwards.
Page 718
- Fold the rear seat cushions forward.
- Fold both the rear backrests forward
- Remove the seat belts from the guides (1).
- Fold the rear backrests forward.
Applies to the S60

Page 331
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics For Aftersales)
VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales)
During the second half of 2004, VADIS (Volvo Aftersales Diagnostic and Information System) was
phased out and replaced by VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales). The purpose
of VIDA is to support service providers in repairing and servicing Volvo vehicles. VIDA provides
Service and Parts information, as well as diagnostic fault tracing, and software downloads. As in
VADIS, these areas are integrated into one single application. All functionality that could be found in
VADIS will be found in VIDA. However, in some particular areas, e.g., the diagnostic work flow,
search functionality, and the Parts catalogue, VIDA contains considerable enhancements when
compared to VADIS.
Volvo's VIDA (Vehicle Information & Diagnostics for Aftersales) system ties together service and
repair data, parts data, service bulletins, software (firmware) downloads, fault tracing and on-board
diagnostic as well as other related information to decrease service time.
Much of the diagnostic information provided here is presented in a manner that assumes the
technician is using the web-based Volvo diagnostic system (VIDA) to diagnose the vehicle. Volvo
does not provide any information based on performing diagnosis with a third party diagnostic tool
aside from a conversion from P Codes to Volvo ECM Codes. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Conversion Table Standardized Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)/Volvo Diagnostic
Trouble Codes
Check Terminals Visually
Cleaning female socket terminals and male pin terminals Greasing female terminals
Check terminals visually
- Use a separate male terminal to check the female terminal. Check that they are secure. Pull on
the pin.

Page 924
54/34 Connector
54/35 Connector
54/37 Connector
54/39 Connector
54/40 Connector
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Communications Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Reading Off Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
Reading off diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
Reading off audio module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
- Ignition on.
- Select FM with the "SOURCE" knob.
- Select AM with the "SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit has a cassette player: Insert a cassette and select the cassette deck with the
"SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit has a CD player: Insert a CD and select CD with the "SOURCE" knob.
- If the car has a CD changer: Insert a CD in the CD changer and select CD changer with the
"SOURCE" knob.
Read off diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) by clicking on the VCT 2000 symbol.
Numeric Result 0 - Fault Found

Page 1248
communication works on another vehicle, the malfunction is in the vehicle.
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Page 900
16/2 Amplifier
16/3-4 RH/LH Front Door Speaker
16/3-4 RH And LH Front Door Speaker
16/5-6 RH/LH Rear Door Speaker

Page 1338
- To access or replace the fuses, see Fusebox, passenger compartment, replacing See:
Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse Block/Service and Repair/Fusebox, Passenger
Compartment, Replacing
- Checking wiring and terminals. Intermittent faults See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals.
Intermittent Faults.
Select Continue
-------------------------------------------------
Page 220
3/80 Switch, LH Central Lock
3/82 Switch, RH Central Lock
3/85 RL/RR Door Power Window Switch

Page 961
Primary lock
Page 21
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation Function
Function
The audio module (AUM) functions as a sound unit in the car and is also connected to other control
modules on the Controller area network (CAN). The audio module (AUM) receives the vehicle
speed signal via the Control area network (CAN). Volume increases with speed (if the function is
selected; the function can be switched off). If a factory-installed carphone (option) is installed, the
audio module (AUM) is muted during telephone calls. If an accessory electronic module (AEM) is
installed, the audio module (AUM) is muted if either a handsfree telephone is used (accessory) or
back-up gear is selected if the car has a back-up warning system (accessory). If the car has the
Road Traffic Information system (RTI) (option), voice information is played back through the
existing loudspeaker. The keypad for remote operation (option) on the steering wheel is directly
connected to the steering wheel module (SWM) via serial communication. The remote control
keypad is on the right-hand side of the steering wheel. It is possible to control the volume
(increase-decrease) and change the preprogrammed radio stations via remote operation. The
buttons are used to select a track when playing a CD, cassette or Mini-Disk. The steering wheel
module (SWM) communicates with the audio module (AUM) via the Controller area network (CAN).
Page 212
2/90 Relay, Windshield Wiper, Low/High Speed
2/91 Relay, Intermittent Windshield Wiper
2/92 Relay, Windshield Washer Motor
2/93 Relay, Rear Window Washer Motor
2/101 Relay For Extended D2 Feed, Automatic Transmission

Page 1185
Fault-Tracing Information
Condition
- No SWM DTCs are stored in the Central electronic module (CEM).
- No DTCs are stored in the Phone module (PHM).
Possible source
- Defective power switch RTI.
- Defective power switch audio/phone.
- Defective power switch cruise control.
Fault symptom[s]
- Cruise control does not operate
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module.
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Page 567
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1333
Page 692
- Lift and pull out the control module.
Check that the control module connector is intact.
NOTE: The pins are fragile. Check that the connector goes straight down into the control module.
- Install the relays and shunts.

Ordering software
Order the software.
Program the new control module. Key codes must be programmed before the central electronic
module will accept the keys that belong to the car. This is carried out in "Add / Remove keys" via
VADIS vehicle communication.
Finishing
example). This is carried out via VADIS vehicle communication
service reminder indicator (SRI).
module ID for the central electronic module, rear electronic module and engine control module
(ECM) via VADIS vehicle communication.
Replacing Rear Electronic Module
Replacing The Integrated Relay / Fusebox In The Cargo Compartment, Rear Electronic Module
NOTE: As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or
correct.
Page 1006
Tool
951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal Tool to
remove the primary lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Page 1231
- Checking wiring and terminals. Intermittent faults See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
Intermittent Faults.
Select Continue
-------------------------------------------------
Page 904
16/57,58 Speaker, LH/RH D-Pillar
16/57,58 Speaker, LH And RH D-pillar
16/60 Integrated Mobile Telephone PHM

Page 287
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18

Page 378
Tool
remove the primary lock, as illustrated.
Page 339
The commonest types of connector and central electrical unit in the vehicle are listed here. For
more information about secondary locking, primary locking, terminal removal tools, etc., see the
link by each type of connector.
Note! Before working in the connector, disconnect the battery negative terminal, Battery,
disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery,
Disconnecting.
Note! When several tools are recommended for the same type of connector, choose the correct
tool according to the size of the lock.
Page 110
Lower spring seat, installing 2
Clean the lower spring seat of the strut assembly and spray with underbody protection 1381063.
Install the lower spring seat on the spring strut. First position the lug (1) in the hole. Then position
lug (2) in its hole and pull the collar through the hole.
Upper spring mounting, installing 3
Check that the shock absorber support plate (1), spring seat(2) and rubber bump stop with boot (3)
are free of damage. Replace if necessary.
Cut off any casting beads from the spring seat to facilitate installing the insulation. Clean the spring
seat before installing the insulation. Install the insulation in the spring seat.
Important!
When installing the spring, check that the spring ends are against the lugs in both the upper and
lower spring seats. The surface (1) must lie against the spring seat bump stop.
Spring, installing 5
Installing Spring, see VADIS Repairing and installing Function group 72, Suspension
Spring front, replacing
WARRANTY STATEMENT: Claims may be submitted under the New Car Warranty when there is a
documented customer complaint, using claim type 01.
Page 384
Primary locking
the cable.
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Open the catches and pull out the secondary lock, use tool 951 2853 Terminal removal tool See:
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 901
16/5-6 RH And LH Rear Door Speaker
16/10 Horn 1
16/11 Horn 2
16/16 Window Antenna Amplifier, Left

Page 1276
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1293
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the RTI switch
- Ignition on.
Activate and read off the status of the buttons in the audio / carphone switch. If the readings give a
correct result, the fault is in the RTI switch.
Other information:
- To access the RTI switch, see the relevant service procedure.
Was the audio / carphone switch status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 431
The control module for the steering wheel angle sensor is supplied with power from the overload
relay.
Steering wheel angle sensor
The steering wheel angle sensor is incorporated with the SRS contact reel, which in turn is installed
on the steering wheel module. The steering wheel angle sensor is equipped with a disc with two
code paths. Two circuits with light diodes read off a code path each. One circuit measures the
steering angle up to 360 degrees and the other records how many complete turns the steering
wheel has turned. Both circuits measure within ±700 degrees with a precision of 4.5 degrees. This
information is transmitted to the control module for the Steering wheel angle sensor as digital
signals.
Due to the reliance of the DSTC (Dynamic stability and traction control) on information from the
steering angle sensor it is extremely important that the contact reel has been centered correctly
and that only an original Volvo steering wheel is used.
Function For information regarding the brake control module or ABS control module, refer DSTC
(Dynamic stability and traction control) in Brake Control System.
SAS Diagnostic Functions

General
Page 1236
- Ignition on.
This function is used to read off the diagnostic data from the control module in thebackground. If
the VIDA log function is activatedwhilethe read out is taking place, all data that is read off will be
logged. The VIDA log function allows logs to be saved or read off for example. This makes it easier
to analyze data or to include the log files in a report for example.
- VIDA log function activated (log status on).

Note! If this has not already been done, exit this procedure. Select vehicle profile and set the
logging status to On.
If the VIDA log function is already activated and has previously logged other activities which are not
required, exit this procedure and log off VIDA. The existing log can then be removed. Delete the log
and close it. Then log on to VIDA again.
Do you want to start reading off? The data read off starts automatically when YES is selected.
Yes - Reading off diagnostic data
No - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off diagnostic data
Continue - Finishing the read off
Numeric Result 0 - Communication fault
-------------------------------------------------
Page 597

Page 1220
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the wiper switch.
Other information:
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the washer using the windshield wiper switch. Read off the status.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 1019
Disconnect the cable terminal that is to be replaced. See: Connectors, repair See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connectors, Repair.
Hint: If several cable terminals are to be replaced at the same time, spread out the splice points, as
illustrated.
Cut the cable at a suitable point. Note the length of the new cable terminal cable.
Installation
Select a cable terminal with the same area as the old one. Select a butt connector that corresponds
to the cable area. The butt connector is the same color as the cable terminal cable. Cut the new
cable terminal cable to a suitable length. Splice the cables. See: Joining the cables See:
Wiring/Joining the Cables.
Finishing work
Reinstall the cable harness. If necessary use a crimping sleeve and tie straps. Connect the battery
negative lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting
Page 923
54/20 Connector
54/21 Connector
54/24 Connector
54/25 Connector
54/32 Connector
Page 1390
Disconnect the two connectors (1) for the ignition cables in the airbag. Remove the steering wheel
module.
Installing the steering wheel module
Install:
In reverse order.
Note! Ensure that the wiring is not trapped during installation.
To adjust the steering wheel, see Steering wheel, replacing See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Page 1358
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1275
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
- To access the RTI switch, see RTI switch See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Sensors and
Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Assembly/Service and
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 874
10/13-14 FL And FR Direction Indicator
10/13-14 FL/FR Direction Indicator
10/15-16 FL/FR Fender Direction Indicator
10/15-16 FL And FR Fender Direction Indicator

Page 283

Fuses 11C/1-17
Page 464
Remove:
- the switches. See Replacing climate control unit switches See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/Replacing Climate Control Unit Switches
Install:
In reverse order.
Page 856
7/110-111 LH/RH Seat Temperature Sensor
7/115-116 LH/RH Front Side Impact Sensor
7/115 LH And RH Front Side Impact Sensor
7/120 RL Angle Sensor

Page 1326
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking Windshield Washing
Checking windshield washing
Checking components
Activate the windshield washer using the windshield wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the wiper switch status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Page 1352
Reading Off the Control Module ID
Reading control unit id
- Ignition on or engine start-up.
Activate read out of control unit id by clicking on the symbol for VCT 2000.
Control unit identification
The information that is read out identifies the hardware and software version of the control unit and
its diagnostic status.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1227
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected.

For the control module, connect an ohmmeter between terminal #16 on the breakout box and the
battery negative terminal.
Page 1225
Select Continue when the fault has been remedied.
Continue - Verification
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Page 432
The control unit has built-in diagnostics, Volvo Diagnostics, which continually monitor the unit and
the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes If the control unit detects a fault, it stores a diagnostic trouble code. If, for
any reason, a fault disappears after the diagnostic trouble code has been permanently stored in the
control unit, information about the trouble code still remains in the control unit.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes Stored diagnostic trouble codes can be read from
the control unit using this facility.
Diagnostic trouble codes may be erased but only after they have been read at least once.
Reading input and output signals Status of control unit input and output signals can be continually
read using this facility.
Reading the control unit identity VADIS identifies control units by reading the number of codes from
the control unit memory. The codes contain information on the control unit as follows:
- hardware component number (control units without software)
- software component number (control units without software)

- software component number
- diagnostic software component number.
Software Downloading New software can be downloaded into the control module for the Steering
wheel angle sensor. When ordering software, the hardware and the software in the car is
compared to the Volvo central database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the
control module. If the comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the
database is updated with the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded.
Page 919

Page 1375
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
Page 996
Adjust the lock pins using an electrician's screwdriver and press up the secondary lock, as
illustrated.
The primary lock
Tool to press down the cable terminal locking tab, as
Page 266
10/17-18 Lamp Housing, RH/LH Tail Light
10/17-18 Lamp Housing, RH And LH Tail Light
10/19 Auxiliary Brake Light
10/25 Ceiling Light, Cargo Compartment

Page 1245
Reading Off the Control Module ID
Activate read out of control unit id by clicking on the symbol for VCT 2000.
Control unit identification
The information that is read out identifies the hardware and software version of the control unit and
its diagnostic status.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1017
Note! In 2003 the cable terminal with a pre-crimped cable section was introduced to the Volvo
range. See the illustration. This method applies for repairs with this type of cable terminal.
Caution! Ensure that the new pin has the same type of surface treatment as the old.
Caution! For repairing SRS wiring, see: Cable harness SRS system, repair See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures.
Preparatory work
Page 1100
- Push the boot to one side and disconnect the connector.

Page 311
53/### Junction Point

Junction Points
All references in the diagrams that begin with the number 53 (i.e. 53/###) are references to the
vehicle's electrical junction points.
Diagrams for the junction points can be found at Branching Point Diagrams. See: Power and
Ground Distribution/Branching Point/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
Locations for the junction points can be found within the Harness Locations images at the vehicle
level. See: Locations/Harness Locations
53/### Junction Points
Junction Points
locations for the junction points can be found within the Harness Locations images at the vehicle
54/No. Connector
54/1B Connector
54/3LA-G Connector
54/3LH Connector
Page 1039
- Ignition off. Wait for 2 minutes
- Remove the cover over the control module box. Put the cover to one side Note! Do not touch the
control module terminal pins with your fingers. Static electricity may damage components in the
control module.
- Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench around the control
module.
- Move the upper section of the tool backwards as far as it will go. Pull up the tool
- Carefully pull up the control module.

Installing the engine control module (ECM)
Page 822
2/112 Unlocking Relay, LH Rear
2/114 Unlocking Relay, RH Rear
2/115 Relay, Deadlock, Rear Doors
2/116 Rear Power Window Up Relay
2/117 Right Rear Power Window Up Relay

Page 1233
Cruise control -button, status
The value indicates whether the -button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control resume button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control resume button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control disengage button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control disengage button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search+ button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone volume+ button, status
The value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio /carphone volume- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Carphone YES button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone YES button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Carphone NO button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone NO button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Page 1083
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 466
- Remove the pen holder above the gear selector panel.
- Remove the panel (1) above the gear selector:
- Carefully pry off at the back using a weatherstrip tool.
- Remove the two screws (2) on the lower edge of the panel
- Remove the panel (3).
Note: The radio component and the dashboard environment panel are complementary and are
mounted at the join with hooked mountings.
Hint: To facilitate removal: Angle the dashboard environment panel outwards so that it is possible
to insert a couple of fingers between the center console and the dashboard environment panel.
- Pull the dashboard environment panel downwards at the same angle. Hint: The dashboard
environment panel is correctly secured. Force is required to remove it.
- remove the connectors. Lift out the panel.
- Install in reverse order.

Note: If any of the outer hooks break off, this must be rectified.
Tape the 3.5 mm thick component measuring 20 X 20 mm to the reverse of the dashboard
environment panel. Use double-sided adhesive tape. Fix the other side of the piece with
double-sided adhesive tape so that there is a solid anchorage when reinstalling against the center
console.
Front panel, replacing

Page 665
Relay / fuse
- Ignition off
- Remove the relay / fuse.
Retainer
Page 732
- Expose the relay box for better access.
- Replace relay/shunt.
Relay position
For position of relays, see:
1. Wiring diagram for model year in question 2. Decals by respective relay and fuse box in the
vehicle 3. Pocket Data booklet 4. Driver's manual
Installing the relay box in the passenger compartment
- Install the relay box on the bracket
- Press the relay box forward so that the catches engage in the bracket and "click".

Preparations
Caution! The customer-programmed data must be read off before the control module is replaced.
The information must then be entered into the new control module after it has been installed. This
is performed via VIDA vehicle communication.
Note! The driver information module (DIM) must not be replaced at the same time. This would
erase the mileage.
Note! Before disconnecting the control module's connector, remove fuses 11C/32, 11C/25 and
11C/21.
Removing the connector and the cover

Page 414
Disconnect the connector from the control module. Press the catch and pull up the connector. Pull
the connector up a maximum of 90 ° (any more and the connector will break). Pull the connector up
from the control module.

Page 1102
Install 3 screws (torx 30). Tighten to 10 Nm.
Caution! It is important that the control module is securely mounted onto the bodywork if the sensor
module is to operate properly.
Other components are reinstalled in reverse order.
Ordering software
Programming control module
Applies to MY 2005-
After downloading and configuring the control module the control module receives the vehicle
configuration data from the central electronic module (CEM). This can take up to 15 seconds and
during this time the SRS lamp flashes in the Driver information module (DIM). Downloading and
configuration is complete when the SRS lamp stops flashing.
Final check
Page 393
INTRODUCTION
-
NOTE! Read through the whole installation instruction before starting the work.
- The front page gives the date of this edition and the edition it replaces
- The second page shows the tools needed for the installation and the contents of the installation
kit
- The illustrations display the procedure in order of operation. The order of operation is repeated in
the text section
- Cut out the text page in order to follow the illustrations and text at the same time.
Connector holder
- Mark the hole for the connector bracket for drilling as illustrated.
- Pre-drill with a smaller drill bit. Enlarge the hole with a -6.5 mm (1/4")" drill bit.
- Remove any swarf. Rust-proof the edges of the holes.

Page 356
Pull the secondary lock out to the side. Use an electrician's screwdriver, as illustrated.
Tool to remove the cable terminal lock, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully
backwards.
Page 612
Engine Compartment Relays, FMA2 - FST3
Passenger Compartment Relays, CMA2 - CSH4

Page 428
8/46 DSTC Activation Module

Page 1072

Page 1408
Page 951
Connector door, see Connector door, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 5
Sealed connectors occur in a number of variants with different numbers of conductors. See
Connector sealed, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Sealed Connector Type 1
Page 1416
CSC
DTC
Text CSC=Customer Symptom Code
DTC=Diagnostic Trouble Code
Note!
If using a printed copy of this Retailer Technical Journal, first check for the latest online version.
NOTE!
THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDES THE PREVIOUS VERSION OF RETAILER TECHNICAL

JOURNAL 16761 DATED 07-01-2010. New AW TF8OSC software has been added for a stalling
condition. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
DESCRIPTION:
The TCM Upgrades in the attached document are available to correct the complaints / symptoms
listed in the attachment.
SERVICE:
If the vehicle fits in the model year or chassis range for the symptom in the attachment download a
TCM Upgrade.
VOLVO STANDARD TIMES GUIDE (VSTG) INFO:
Operation number 36004-2 - Control module software download- See VSTG
- Claims may be submitted under the new car warranty when there is a documented customer
complaint using claim type: 01
- Labor times are valid at the time of release and are subject to change.
Page 121
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 1142
The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the steering wheel
module (SWM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication
and Controller area network (CAN) communication. The following illustration displays the same
information with the Volvo component designations.
Page 1268
Was the direction indicator switch status OK?
No - Replacing a component
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing a component
Change direction indicator switch.
Other information:
- Turn signal switch, replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
Select continue when the defect has been remedied.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the direction indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking the windshield wiper switch
-------------------------------------------------
Try replacing the control module.
Other information
- Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and
Repair
Relay For Extended D2 Feed, Automatic Transmission

Locations
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations
Location of components
Location Of Components
- SWM control unit (1)
- Cruise control switch unit (2)
- Radio/telephone switch unit (3)
- Indicator switch (4)
- Wiper switch (5)
- RTI switch unit (6).

Locations
Power Door Lock Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 1289
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 39
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 410
Disconnect the cable terminal that is to be replaced. See: Connectors, repair See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connectors, Repair.
Hint: If several cable terminals are to be replaced at the same time, spread out the splice points, as
illustrated.
Cut the cable at a suitable point. Note the length of the new cable terminal cable.
Installation
Select a cable terminal with the same area as the old one. Select a butt connector that corresponds
to the cable area. The butt connector is the same color as the cable terminal cable. Cut the new
cable terminal cable to a suitable length. Splice the cables. See: Joining the cables See:
Wiring/Joining the Cables.
Finishing work
Reinstall the cable harness. If necessary use a crimping sleeve and tie straps. Connect the battery
negative lead. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting
Page 282
Fuses 11B/11-23
11B/No. Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box
11C Fuses In Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
11C/no. Fuses In Passenger Compartment

Page 1228
ohms The ohmmeter should read 0.
Yes - Fault Found
No - Fault-tracing information
-------------------------------------------------
Information
The fault should be diagnosed and remedied. Since this is not the case the fault-tracing process
has failed. Complete the fault-tracing for those fault or try again.
Do you want to terminate fault-tracing at this time?
Yes - FAULT-TRACING FAILED

No - Attempt New Test
------------------------
Page 877
10/46, 10/53 Fog Light, Right/Left Rear
10/47, 10/54 RR/RL Direction Indicator
10/48, 10/55 RH/LH Reversing Light
10/43, 10/50 RH/LH Brake Light

Page 1263
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - steering wheel module

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Dstc Activation Module
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dstc Activation Module

Page 231
6/3-4 RH/LH Headlight Wiper Motor
6/3-4 RH And LH Headlight Wiper Motor
6/15 Sunroof Motor
6/16 Driver Seat Motor, Backrest Angle

Page 528
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 401
Note! The sleeve must sit in the correct output of the pressure tool, position "Green".
Feed the end of the wire in the shrink tubing that is held by the pliers. Feed the wire into the shrink
tubing until it stops, make sure that the wire insulation does not go near the clamp on the sleeve or
the stripped wire will protrude outside the sleeve.
Page 1296
Check the voltage between terminals #B1 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 12 V. Check
the voltage between terminals #B2 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 5 V. Check the
voltage between terminal #B3 and the battery negative terminal. Voltage should be approximately 0
V. If the above readings are OK, the fault is in the cruise control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Error Message

Page 1079
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 783
- Release the catch on the rear. Use a screwdriver
Check
- Install the relays and shunts. For relay locations, see instruction Relay location.
- Install the integrated relay / fusebox, see Installing the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
Ordering software
Other information
Ground Distribution/Locations.
Interior Lighting and Upper Electronic Module (UEM), Replacing
Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM), replacing
Replacing the lens and the bulb

Page 275
11B/11-23
11 C/no. Fuses In Passenger Compartment

Page 734

Page 941
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures. In theory, the resistance across
contacts, leads and terminals should be 0 [ohm]. However, there is always some resistance due to
terminal oxidation. If this resistance becomes too great the result will be a malfunction. The
magnitude of the resistance before it causes a malfunction depends on the circuit load.
Checks:
- Check the cables visually according to "Check Terminals Visually."
NOTE: Do not apply rust solvent spray or grease to the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) or
combined instrument panel connectors.
- Ignition off
- Disconnect the battery negative terminal
- Use compressed air to clean the disconnected connector
- Apply rust solvent spray 1161422 to the disconnected connectors
- Blow clean using compressed air.

Page 385
Tool
Primary locking
Page 775
In reverse order.
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver door module (DDM), replacing
Preparations
Always check that the control module and control module box connectors do not have bent or
damaged terminals or sockets. This may have been the cause of the fault.
Removing the driver door module (DDM)
Ignition off.
Remove:
- the door panel, see Replacing the front door side panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Door Side Panel.
- the nut and screw holding the control module in place
- the connectors.
Pull up the rear edge of the door module. Pull the control module backwards and upwards. Detach
the control module from the mounting on the door panel. Press up the control module.
Page 1097
- If the Controller area network (CAN) communication does not function.
Depending on the situations mentioned above, this may mean that in the event of a low speed
collision the seat belt tensioner on the driver's side activates while the airbag deploys on the
passenger side.
Information about the use of the seat belt buckle depends on the model year. The differences are:
- For model year 1999-2002: Information about the use of the driver and passenger seat belt
buckles comes from the central electronic module (CEM) (4/56) on the controller area network
(CAN). A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored in the central electronic module (CEM) if the fault
occurs in the driver's or passenger front seat belt buckle. The central electronic module (CEM)
sends this information on to the supplemental restraint system module (SRS) which stores a
corresponding diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
- For model year 2003: The driver and passenger seat belt buckles are directly connected to the
supplemental restraint system module (SRS).
The SRS (supplemental restraint system) indicator lamp lights with the ignition on. If no faults are
found by the control module, either internally or on the sensor, wiring or igniter, a signal is
transmitted via the Controller Area Network to the driver information network to switch off the SRS
warning lamp. If a fault occurs, the supplemental restraint system module (SRS) transmits
information to the driver information module (DIM) about which lamp to light and the text to be
displayed in the combined instrument panel. The driver information module (DIM) continuously
transmits information to the supplemental restraint system module (SRS) via the controller area
network (CAN) about the status of the SRS indicator lamp. If the SRS (supplemental restraint
system) indicator lamp stops functioning the red light in the general warning lamp is used instead.
NOTE: After a collision the wiring to the airbags and/or seat belt tensioners which have deployed
must be replaced. The reason is that the connectors can melt at the moment of deployment. If a
connector has melted, the closest wiring must be replaced.
WARNING: The ignition must be switched off before carrying out work on the SRS (supplemental
restraint system). Otherwise the airbags can deploy by mistake.
Page 707
- Install the new bracket on the right-hand rear side member as illustrated
- Install and tighten the bracket parallel with the side member. Use the screw and the nut from the
kit
- Remove any swarf.
- Detach the bracket and treat the edges of the holes using a rust-proofing agent.
- Tighten the bracket to the side member.
- Tighten the rear bolt/nut to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.).
Applies to cars equipped with a Diversity aerial amplifier
- Wrap foam tape around the cable / wiring for the aerial amplifier.
Applies to all models
- Take the accessory electronic module from the kit. Connect the routed cable to the cable
illustrated.
Page 1093
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS)
SRS safety equipment
WARNING: The car has pyrotechnical airbags and seat belt tensioners. The components in the
SRS system must be treated very carefully during repair.
This is to help prevent:
1. Personal injury when carrying out repairs 2. Damage to or malfunction of the SRS system.
WARNING: The SRS system must always be worked on by a qualified workshop.
1. The steering wheel module.
2. The passenger airbag module.
3a/b. SIPS module (Side Impact Protection System) and Sensors in B- and C-posts.
4a. Seat belt with seat belt tensioner, front seat
4c. Seat belt with seat belt tensioner, Rear seat
5b. IC, Inflatable Curtain
6. WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System).
7. The SRS control module.
Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), reuse
NOTE: The illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and/or
models. Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
When repairing a crashed vehicle, the Volvo policy is to replace those systems that may have been
damaged where full function cannot be guaranteed.
What is replaced and when? Driver/passenger airbag modules and seat belt tensioners indicate
clearly when they have deployed and must be replaced.
Page 479

Page 736
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Door Module (Power Windows, Power Mirrors, Child
Locks, Central Locking), Front Doors
Door module (power windows, power mirrors, child locks, central locking), front doors
Replacing the driver door module (DDM) and passenger door module (PDM)
Preparations
damaged terminals or socket / sleeves. This may have been the cause of the fault.
This method of removal applies to both the driver door module (DDM) and the passenger door
module (PDM).
The illustration shows the driver door module (DDM).
- Ignition off
- Remove the door panel
- Remove the nut and screw holding the door module
- Pry up the rear edge of the door module. Pull the door module backwards and upwards. Remove
the door module from its mounting on the door panel
- Press up the door module.
To remove the upper panel, see Removing the upper panel.

Page 1407
CSC
DTC
Text CSC=Customer Symptom Code
DTC=Diagnostic Trouble Code
Note!
NOTE!
THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDES THE PREVIOUS VERSION OF RETAILER TECHNICAL

JOURNAL 16761 DATED 07-01-2010. New AW TF8OSC software has been added for a stalling
condition. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
DESCRIPTION:
The TCM Upgrades in the attached document are available to correct the complaints / symptoms
listed in the attachment.
SERVICE:
If the vehicle fits in the model year or chassis range for the symptom in the attachment download a
TCM Upgrade.
Operation number 36004-2 - Control module software download- See VSTG
- Claims may be submitted under the new car warranty when there is a documented customer
complaint using claim type: 01
- Labor times are valid at the time of release and are subject to change.
Page 582
pressing the catch through the opening. Use a screwdriver
- Remove the screw from the control module
- Remove the control module.
Check
Check that the control module connectors are intact.
- Screw the control module screw into place
- Connect the connector for the control module
- Reinstall the cover for the control module connector
- Connect the 2 connectors
- Press the bulb holder into place
- Install the ground lead
- Install the 2 screws at the front edge
- Install the lens.
Ordering software
NOTE: The VIN number of the vehicle consists of 17 characters. The 7th character from the left
indicates the installation plant. The last 6 characters are the chassis number. A 1 indicates
Torslanda as the installation plant. A 2 indicates Europe Car as the installation plant.
Start by identifying the chassis number of the car and the installation unit. Then order the correct
software for programming the upper electronic module. The order process is carried out, and
afterwards one returns here.
Download the software to the control module. Select the correct download procedure from the
chassis number and installation unit in the following paragraph, Programming the control module.
For the following cars:
Order software.

Page 389
Fuse holder cargo compartment.
Fuse holder passenger compartment.
Primary lock
Page 759
Applies to the S80
- Remove the cargo compartment carpet (1)
- Turn the clip (2) for the left and right side panels. Remove the clips and the plastic nut. Remove
the panels
- Remove the two covers (3). Slacken off the two screws (4) from under the cover. Grip the outer
edges of the panel (5). Pull the panel inwards towards the centre so that the clips release at the
sides. Disconnect the connectors (6) for the cargo compartment lamps
- Remove the panel by pulling it straight upwards so that the clips release from the rear
crossmember.
Remove:
- the clips (1) from the left front side panel in the cargo compartment
- the panel. Place the panel to one side
- repeat the operation on the other side.
Applies to the V70
- Remove both floor hatches. First lift the rear edges of the floor hatches slightly. Then pull the
Page 243
7/51 Accelerator Pedal Sensor
7/56-57 LH/RH Rear ABS Sensor
7/56-57 LH And RH Rear ABS Sensor
7/61 Input Speed Sensor

Page 925
54/40A Connector
54/43A Connector
54/44 Connector
54/45 Connector
54/50 Connector
Page 1259
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
communicated with. If communication is not possible
Page 75
^ April 2009: New SW upgrade disc P/N for MMM+ only. This kit contains two discs, One for the
boot loader SW and the other for the application SW. The old disc P/N 31215588 is still used for
the MMM systems (non HDD).
Page 461
Remove:
- the two screws (2) on the lower edge of the panel
- the panel (3).
Note! The radio component and the comfort panel are complementary and are mounted at the joint
with hooked mountings.
Hint: To facilitate removal: Angle the dashboard environment panel outwards so that it is possible
to insert a couple of fingers between the centre console and the dashboard environment panel. Pull
the dashboard environment panel downwards at the same angle.
Hint: The dashboard environment panel is correctly secured. Force is required to remove it.
- connectors.
Lift out the panel.
Install:
In reverse order.
Page 291
16/2 Amplifier
16/3-4 RH And LH Front Door Speaker

Page 319
54/3LH Connector
54/4 Connector
54/7 Connector
54/8 Connector
54/9 Connector
Page 720
- Remove both side cushions. First pull the upper edge of the cushions backwards. Then lift the
cushions upwards.
Applies to the S60
- Remove the cargo compartment carpet at the rear edge. First turn the two handles (1) 90°.
Applies to the S60
- Pull up the front of the cargo compartment carpet. Fold the front half back over the rear half of the
cargo compartment carpet.
Applies to the S60

Page 26
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 343
Connectors, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Sealed
Page 866
8/62 Belt Tensioner Igniter, Center Rear Seat
8/64 Solenoid Valve, Engine Mounting
8/66-67 LH/RH Inflatable Curtain Igniter
8/66-67 LH And RH Inflatable Curtain Igniter

Page 1354
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Page 531
Other Relays
Page 1436
Shifting occurs differently during engine warm up. This function is used to help the engine reach its
operating temperature by preventing torque converter lock-up and by delaying up shifts. This
function works in the D-position but not in the winter mode (W). Because of this function, it is
normal for the 1-2 and 2-3 shift to be noticeably delayed when the car engine is cold. This is a
normal consequence of this function.
Temperature controlled lock-up
If the transmission temperature increases abnormally as a result of heavy load under high ambient
temperature conditions, the torque converter lock-up function is activated as often as possible
(temperature controlled lock-up). This reduces slippage and the generation of heat in the
transmission. If the temperature drops below +200 C the lock-up function will not be used.
Slipping lock-up
The slipping lock-up function provides smoother engagement with reduced vibration and decreased
noise when a gear is engaged. In this mode, the torque converter clutch is engaged, but not fully
locked. The following must be met in order for the function to activate: -
Gear selector in position D, 4 or 3
- Gear 3, 4 or 5
- The transmission input speed is 1100 rpm or more and the throttle opening is 35 % or less - The
transmission oil temperature is 40 - 120°C.
Due to the torque converter slipping between 50200 rpm, the friction properties of the transmission
fluid are very important. The transmission fluid differs from conventional ATF oil properties. Always
use the specified fluid for this transmission. Failure to do so may compromise the function and set
a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The engine coolant must reach a certain temperature before the
function engages.
Driving uphill
The transmission control module (TCM) may change the gear shift pattern slightly when driving
uphill. This is to avoid busy shifting.
Neutral control (only available on certain models)
This function is activated when the driver stops the car and the car is stationary, at traffic lights for
example. The transmission control module (TCM) then disengages the C1 clutch which releases
the forward drive of the transmission and reduces the load on the engine. The function improves
fuel consumption and reduces vibrations at idle speed. When the driver releases the brake, the C1
clutch engages and drive is resumed. The following conditions must be met for the Neutral control
function to be activated: -
Gear selector in position D, 4, or 3 when Winter mode and Geartronic are not selected
- Oil temperature above + 100 C
- Throttle position less than 3 %
- Brake pedal depressed
- Speed 0 km/h
- Engine speed less than 1500 rpm.
There are two time factors for engagement: There is a 2 second delay in position D when
stationary and a 5 second delay at N to D.
Shifting using Geartronic
When the gear selector is moved to the Geartronic position (MAN) the automatic transmission
remains in hydraulic position D, but when the gear selector is moved upwards (+) the gear selector
module (GSM) transmits a signal to the transmission control module (TCM) to shift up. When the
gear selector is moved downwards (-) a signal is transmitted to the transmission control module
(TCM) to shift down. The driver information module (DIM) switches the symbol in the combined
instrument panel from D to the current gear, for example 3, when the gear selector is in the MAN
position. A signal is sent to the gear selector module (GSM) to light the M LED and switches off the
other LEDs. The transmission control module (TCM) determines if shifting can be carried out and
the driver information module (DIM) indicates the current gear. If shifting is permitted the solenoids
are activated according to each specific gear pattern. However, in certain situations the
transmission control module (TCM) assumes the shifting decision. The following applies: -
When stationary only 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears can be selected. 4th gear can be selected at speeds
in excess 30 km/h and 5th at speeds in excess of 40 km/h
- Automatic down shifting occurs below a certain speed. Example: 2nd gear is selected. Automatic
down shifting occurs when shifting from 2nd gear to 1st at 2 km/h if the speed, before then,
exceeds 25 km/h. in other cases 2nd gear is retained. For example, when 3rd gear is engaged
despite the car being stationary
Page 797
models, some variation may occur. However, the essential information is always correct.
Preparation
Remove the side panel on right-hand side.
Removing the lock plate
Slacken off the screw slightly and twist out the lock plate. Remove the lock plate.
Exposing the control module

Page 827
3/60 Auxiliary Light Switch
3/62 Hood Alarm Contact
3/71 Gear Position Contacts
3/73 Power Child Lock (PCL) Switch
3/74-77 LH/RH Front/Rear Door Lock Unit

Page 892

Fuses 11C/1-17
Page 1244
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading off diagnostic data

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1329
Page 418
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing ABS / DSTC (Dynamic Stability
and Traction Control) Control Module
Replacing ABS / DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) control module
Preparation
Removing the battery lead
Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery,

Disconnecting.
Preparations for replacement
Note! There is no need to download software when replacing the ABS control module.
Removing the air cleaner (ACL) housing
Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Removing the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
Brake pipe from hydraulic unit / front wheel / junction, replacing See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe From Hydraulic Unit /
Front Wheel / Junction, Replacing.
Removal
Remove:
- the pump motor connector
- the four screws. Use a 6 mm torx external socket.
Carefully lower the control module.
Checking the control module

Page 875
10/17-18 Lamp Housing, RH And LH Tail Light
10/19 Auxiliary Brake Light
10/25 Ceiling Light, Cargo Compartment

Page 301
20/33 Shunt, Parking Light/tail Light REM
20/34 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Right
20/39 Shunt, Cargo Compartment 12 V Outlet
31/No. Ground Connection

Page 1290
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
- To access the cruise control switch, see RTI switch See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted
Controls Assembly/Service and Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
no - Checking components and wiring
-------------------------------------------------
Page 779
For the location of the fuses, see:
the car 3. Pocket data book 4. Owner's Manual
Removing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo compartment

Page 1305
- Defective RTI switch unit
- Defective audio/telephone switch unit
- Defective cruise-control switch unit.
Fault symptom[s]
- RTI switch unit does not work.
Checking the RTI Switch

Checking the RTI switch
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:

Page 956
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM). See Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), repair See:
Connectors, Repair/Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), Repair.
Page 853
7/62 Output Speed Sensor
7/73 Coolant Level Monitor
7/74 Oil Temperature Sensor, Automatic Transmission
7/77 Temperature Sensor, Intake Air
7/81 Pressure Sensor, Intake Manifold

Page 153
pressing the catch through the opening. Use a
Page 825
3/9 Brake Light Contact
3/10 Reversing Light Contact
3/25 Power Sunroof Switch
3/26 Power Driver's Seat Module
3/27 Power Passenger Seat Module

Page 554
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1001
Page 819
2/61 Relay, Parking Light
2/63 High Beam Relay
2/72 Relay, Rear Window Wiper
2/75 Rear Adjustable Head Restraint Relay

Page 1205
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 782
Note! Do not damage the pins.
- Remove all relays and shunts bridged to the control module.
Note the locations.

Page 1114

Page 987
Tool
Page 1297
Checking the error message
Note! Many serious error messages cannot be erased from the display window. This remains in the
display window until the error concerned has been dealt with.
Does the error message indicate a serious error?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the indicator switch
Activate the read and reset button on the indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.
Did read-out of status on read and reset button give a correct result?

-------------------------------------------------
Replacing.

Page 221
3/91 Switch, LH Heated Seat
3/92 Switch, RH Heated Seat
3/93-94 Left/Right Seatbelt Latch Switch

Page 752
- Reinstall the floor support. Tighten the floor support together with the bracket for the accessory
electronic module. Use the three M6-screws, tightening them to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.).
- Position two new spacer washers between the front hole in the bracket and the floor support.
Tighten using a new self tapping screw.
illustrated.
- Reinstall the panels.
- Refit the insulation panel.
- Reinstall the storage box.
- Reinstall both floor hatches

Page 690
- Insert a screwdriver between the bracket and the relay box. Turn the screwdriver so that the
bracket opens out. At the same time, pull the relay box out of the bracket towards the underside of
the dashboard
- Lift the relay box off the bracket. Pull the relay box downward under the dashboard.
Replacing the relay and/or shunt
- Replace the relay and/or shunt.
Relay location
- Press the relay box forward so that the catches engage in the bracket and "click"
Removing the control module Preparations
CAUTION: The customer-programmed data must be read off before the control module is replaced.
is carried out via VADIS vehicle communication.
NOTE: The driver information module must not be replaced at the same time. This would erase the
mileage.
car. VADIS reads off the new control module
Page 1015
Junction sleeve
951 2785 Crimping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2785 Crimping Tool
Page 123

Page 838
4/70 Upper Electronic Module UEM
4/71 Cooling Fan Control Module
4/76 Remote Control Unit For Garage Door Opener
4/78 Accessory Electronic Module AEM
4/201-202 LH/RH Seat Heater Control Module

Page 949
Connectors occur in a number of variants with different numbers of conductors. See Connectors,
repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 1
Page 1252
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 370
Tool
Page 1172
Condition
- No diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the PHM.
Possible source
- Open circuit, short-circuit to earth or short-circuit to voltage supply on the wire

Fault symptom[s]
- Audio/telephone switch unit does not work.
Checking the Audio/Telephone Switch Unit
Checking the audio/telephone switch unit
- Ignition on.
Activate buttons and read status on audio/telephone switch unit buttons. If read-out gave a correct
result the fault is not in the SWM unit.
Page 1437
- Manual up shifting is required after automatic down shifting. Kick-down is not available in the
Geartronic-position (MAN)
- The permitted speed for manual down shifting corresponds to those for kick-down downshifting,
i.e. engine speed at approximately 6 000 rpm
- If the transmission temperature becomes too high the transmission control module (TCM)
determines the shift position. The purpose is to maintain a gear where lock-up is possible at the
current speed
- Lock-up is possible in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears. (1st and 2nd gears do not have lock-up).
Other
In position MAN the lever position signal to the gear selector module (GSM) is generated as
follows: For each of the three gear selector positions a hall sensor is mounted on the printed circuit
board for the gear selector control module (GSM). A permanent magnet on the lever affects the
output signals from the sensors to the control module. The control module can read off the position
of the lever through the differences in the signal characteristics.
Shift-lock
To avoid any chance of the gear selector inadvertently moving from the P position, the car is also
equipped with an electrically operated shift lock function. This locks the interlock pin in the gear
selector lever in the shift-lock section, locking the selector lever in the P position. To move the gear
selector from the P position, the ignition must be switched on and the brake pedal depressed. (The
stop lamp switch is activated.). The central electronic module (CEM) reads the position of the brake
pedal via direct connection to the brake pedal sensor and transmits a signal to the gear selector
control module (GSM) to deactivate the solenoid in the gear lever selector. The solenoid lock pin is
pushed in and the gear selector lock button can be pressed down as usual to select another gear.
When the ignition is in position "0", the solenoid is deactivated. In this position the shifter is
mechanically locked by the key lock cable.
Ignition switch interlock
An interlock and security feature (ignition switch interlock) is mechanically connected to the ignition
switch by a cable. The ignition switch interlock is controlled by the position of the lock cylinder in
the ignition switch and by the position of the gear selector. This means that the gear selector must
be in the P-position for the ignition key to be removed from the ignition switch. The ignition key
must be turned to position I or 11 before the lever can be moved from the P-position. The ignition
switch interlock is used only in combination with shift-lock.
Park neutral position (PNP) function
The gear-shift position sensor has a park/neutral position (PNP) function to prevent the engine
being started with a gear selected. This function prevents the engine being started unless the P or
N positions are selected. This prevents the car from lurching forwards when started.
Page 944
Checking female socket terminals and male pin terminals Greasing female terminals
Inspect terminals visually
Repair wiring and cable terminals as required, using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Using a loose male connector, test to see if the female connector provides a good contact and
that the pin remains in place when the male connector is pulled lightly
- Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during measurement to locate damage.
Open-Circuit, Intermittent Faults
Open-circuit, Intermittent faults
An open-circuit in a cable will be indicated by the loss of a function (or functions). Chafed and
broken leads are common causes of faults. Repair wiring and cable terminals as required, using
appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Disconnect the connectors at both ends of the cable.
Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually".
Connect an ohmmeter between the ends of the cable. The ohmmeter should read approximately 0
[ohm] if there is no open-circuit in the cable. Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during
measurement to locate the damage.
Page 316
54/40A Connector
54/43A Connector
54/44 Connector
54/45 Connector
54/50 Connector
Page 614
Other Relays
Page 193
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 157
Check Check that the control module connectors are intact.
- Install the lens.
Ordering software Order software
Programming the control module Program the new control module
Finishing Program in the data read off from the old control module.
Interior lighting, replacing Removal Preparations
- Remove the interior lighting and the switch for the sun roof.
NOTE: The rear view mirror (upper electronic module) does not need to be removed.
Page 346
Connector Control module for anti-lock brakes (ABS). See Connector control module for Anti-lock
Brake System Module (ABS), repair See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Control Module for
Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), Repair.
Page 840
6/3-4 RH And LH Headlight Wiper Motor
6/15 Sunroof Motor
6/16 Driver Seat Motor, Backrest Angle

Page 753
Accessory Electronic Module With Wiring Kit

Page 1108
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1047
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 262
9/25 Rear 12 V Outlet
9/25 Rear 12V Outlet
9/32 FTC Resistor - Air Preheating
9/32 PTC Resistor - Air Preheating
10/1-2 LH/RH Front Lamp Housing

Suspension - Resonance/Vibration
Coil Spring Insulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Resonance/Vibration
S60/S80/V70 (01-) 1999-2003
Section
Group
72
No. 0006
Year 2003
Month
07
Spring strut/wheel, insulation
Background:
Resonance sound (340 Hz) can occur from the wheel which is transmitted via the spring strut.
Rubber spring seats (insulator plates) have been developed as service solutions. This Service
Bulletin describes how these insulating plates must be installed.
Materials
Description Quantity P/N
Spring seat, upper 2 30666314

Spring seat, lower 2 30666315
Flange lock nut 6 971100
Washer 6 976944
Underbody protection 0.1 1381063
Springs Spring strut/wheel, insulation
Spring, removing 1
Remove the spring, see VADIS Repairing and installing Function group 72, Suspension

Page 312
54/4 Connector
54/7 Connector
54/8 Connector
54/9 Connector
54/10 Connector
Page 1243
voltage according to references above.
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1052

Page 369
Angle out the catches on both sides. Pull out the secondary lock.
Primary lock
Power Driver's Seat Module
Power Seat Control Module: Locations Power Driver's Seat Module
4/52 Power Driver Seat Module PSM

Page 792
Release the upper catches using a weatherstrip tool. Lift out the control module.
Note! Check that the control module's connectors are intact.
Installing the passenger door module (PDM)
Press the control module into place.
Install:
- the connectors
- the nut and screw
Door Side Panel.
Ordering software
Order software for the passenger door module (PDM) according to the table below.
Finishing
Initialise the window position in the communication input.
Relay/Fuse Box Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module (REM), Replacing
Relay/fuse box cargo compartment/Rear electronic module (REM), replacing
correct.
Exposing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo compartment

Page 246
7/108-109 LH/RH Rear Side Impact Sensor
7/108-109 LH And RH Rear Side Impact Sensor
7/110-111 LH and RH Seat Temperature Sensor

Page 538
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 710
- Remove the left side panel by first removing the cover and the screw from the front edge.
- Pull the top edge of the panel out until the clips release
- Fold the panel inwards. Lift the panel out.
- Repeat the operation on the other side.
- Remove the insulation panel from the cargo compartment.
- Remove the 4 x screws in the tailgate sill panel.

Page 235
6/44 Cooling Fan, Electrics Box, Engine Compartment
6/48 Damper Motor, Recirculation
6/58-60 Motor, FL/FR Power Window

A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various Concerns/Issues
Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various Concerns/Issues
TIE Technical Journal
Title Transmission Control Module (TCM) Software (SW)
Ref No US16761.1.7 en-GB
Issuer -
Partner 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group 4378
Func Desc software
Status Released
Status Date 2011-01-05
Issue Date 2011-01-03
Reference VIDA, VSTG, RTJs 17906, 20857, 23193
Attachment
Vehicle Type
Page 791
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Passenger door module (PDM), replacing
Preparations
damaged terminals or sockets. This may have been the cause of the fault.
Removing the passenger door module (PDM)
Ignition off.
Remove:
Door Side Panel.
- the nut and screw holding the control module in place
- the connectors.
Grasp the underneath of the control module. Press upwards. Carefully pull the module from the
lower catches.
Page 977
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 4
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1053
Other Relays
Page 361
Primary locking
Check that the catches for the cable terminal are undamaged. Press the cable terminal into the
housing. Check that the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable.
Secondary locking
Connector Type 2
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
Page 802
Read off the programmed values. To change the time, mark the desired value in the scrolling list
and start programming.
Do you want to program any more parameters?
Yes - Programming a long interior lighting period
No - Fault Found
------------------------
Programming a long interior lighting period

The general lighting and rear reading lamps light and remain lit for 10 minutes when:
- A door is opened after being unlocked.
- The lamp is lit with a switch.
The default period is 10 minutes. This can be changed to between 0 and 255 minutes at 10 minute
intervals. Read off the programmed values. To change the time, mark the desired value in the
scrolling list and start programming.
------------------------
FAULT FOUND - Checking the anti-dazzle function in the rear view mirror
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the anti-dazzle function in the rear view mirror
Checking the anti-dazzle function in the rear view mirror
Checking the anti-dazzle function
Note! If the upper electronic module (UEM) has been replaced software, specially developed for
downloading after replacing the control module, must be downloaded to the control module before
the anti-dazzle function is changed. See Upper electronic module (UEM) rear view / door mirror,
replacing See: .
The rear view mirror anti-dazzle function can be adjusted:
- If the rear view mirror anti-dazzle function is too powerful or too weak, it can be adjusted.
Specific software for setting the anti-dazzle function must be installed in the car to do this. Order
the software. See9499432. Install the software. See9499432.
Continue - DONE
------------------------
DONE - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Page 373
Primary lock
Page 1316
Checking the steering wheel module (SWM)
Before continuing with fault-tracing, the following must be checked:
- All tests for the relevant symptom must have been carried out
- No component, connector or wiring faults etc. should have been detected.
Have all tests been carried out and no faults detected?
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 522
Brake Lamp Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 271
10/126 RH Front Courtesy Lighting
10/129-130 FL/FR Parking Light
10/129-130 FL And FR Parking Light
10/148 LH Rearview Mirror Lighting

Page 276
11C/1-17
11C/18-25
Page 1315
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
- Faulty control module.
Fault symptom[s]
- Turn signal lever does not work
- Windshield wiper does not work
Checking the Steering Wheel Module (SWM)

Page 784
Removal
- Fold down the cover. See illustration.
- Press the catches outwards. Remove the lens.
- Remove the bulb. Use a weatherstrip tool or similar.
Installation
- Install the bulb.
- Press the lens into place.
- Press the cover into place.
Replacing the bulb holder in the rear view mirror unit

The upper electronic module (UEM) is integrated in the rear view mirror. For more information
about removing the rear view mirror, see or the rear view mirror.
Page 1175
- Ignition off.
- Disconnect audio/telephone switch unit by loosening the lower connector on the audio/telephone
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
result the fault is in the audio/telephone switch unit.
- To access audio/telephone switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 391
Note! The relay holders can be connected and several locks may need to be adjusted at the same
time.
At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Installation
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Slide back the secondary lock.
Finishing work
Install the relays.

Reinstall the central relay box.
Connector Holder
Connector holder
Page 916

Page 975
Secondary lock
Fold up the secondary lock. If necessary use an electrician's screwdriver.
Primary lock
Page 399
Twist the strands on the stripped wire ends. Do NOT forget to do this on all four wire ends.
Note! Make sure the strands are twisted.
Joining the wire ends with the same colors/ single or multi-colored
Page 1386
- the connector (2) for the horn and the keypads
- the three screws (3). Lift out the horn (4).
Applies to cars with pre-routed wiring
- Press in the catch (1) on the connector for the right dummy button
- Remove the connector from the dummy button.
- Remove the screw (1) in the dummy button on the right hand side of the horn
- Press in the catch (2). At the same time pull the dummy button from its socket. Place to one side.
If there is pre-routed wiring, continue to applicable procedure.
Note! If there is no pre-routed connector the horn must be replaced. A new one is in the kit.
- Remove the screw (1) in the dummy button on the left hand side of the horn
- Press in the catch (2). At the same time pull the dummy button from its socket.
Note! Keep the dummy button. The dummy button will be reused.
Page 1048
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 286
11C/No. Fuses In Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
11D Fuses In Cargo Compartment Fuse Box
11D/no. Fuses In Cargo Compartment

Page 1219
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking Windshield Washing
Checking windshield washing
Checking components
Page 195

Page 32
- Ignition on.
This service provides extended assistance when fault-tracing intermittent faults. It is primarily
intended for use when the fault cannot be found using the ordinary fault-tracing for the diagnostic
trouble code (DTC).
- Read off by clicking the VCT2000 symbol
- Read off the stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the upper list box
- Select the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the upper list box to read off the information for a
specific stored DTC.
For further information, see Description of reading extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
information See: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/Description of Reading Extended Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Information.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Communication has been interrupted for one of the following reasons:
- The ignition is switched off

Page 222
3/95 Spin Control Switch
3/111 Light Switch Module LSM
3/112 Climate Control Module CCM
3/113 Rear adjustable head restraint relay

Page 407
Caution! Protect the surroundings from the heat.
951 2850 Hot air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2850 Hot Air Gun 951 2851 Hot-air gun See:
Tools and Equipment/951 2851 Hot-Air Gun 951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951
2777 Hot-Air Gun
Cable Shoe
Cable shoe
Note! The illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and/or models.
Information
Page 404
When the first join is completed and checked, join the rest of the wire ends in the same way.
Heating the shrink tubing
The shrink tubing ensures the electric wire is satisfactory and provides a safe join. Hold a pad or
other item behind the shrink tubing to avoid heat escaping.
Hint: Suitable setting of heat gun951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2777 Hot-Air
Gun , air distribution switch in position 2 and potentiometer for temperature setting in position
between 2 and 3.
Heat the sleeve using the hot air gun951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2777
Hot-Air Gun and suitable jet kit. Heat the shrink tubing rapidly to avoid heat escaping. It is very
important that the shrink tubing is correctly shrunk around the wire. It should be tight at both ends.
Note! Adjust the heat shield if necessary.
Joining the Cables
Joining the cables

Connecting
see information about SRS cables: Refer to: Cable harness SRS system, repair See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures
Perform battery disconnection. Refer to: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
see information about cable terminals surface treatment. Refer to: Cable terminals surface
treatment See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Cable
Terminals Surface Treatment
Page 1098
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Input and Output Signals
Input And Output Signals
The illustration shows the control signals. In addition to these signals there is a repetitive diagnostic
signal between the SRS module and all peripheral units in the safety system. When the SRS
system is started, (when the ignition is switched on), the SRS module performs a system test after
which the SRS indicator lamp in the combined instrument panel goes out. The SRS module then
switches to monitor mode.
Components parts
1. SIPS module, driver's seat. 2. Driver's airbag. 3. SRS lamp. 4. Passenger Airbag. 5. SIPS,
passenger seat. 6. Side impact sensor, B-post on right-hand side. 7. Seat belt tensioner, B-post on
right-hand side. 8. SRS module. 9. Central electronic module (CEM).
10. Seat belt buckle, right front seat. 11. Side impact sensor, C-post on right-hand side. 12. IC,
right-hand side. 13. Seat belt tensioner, right-hand side in rear seat. 14. Seat belt tensioner, rear
center seat. 15. Seat belt tensioner, left-hand side in rear seat. 16. IC, left-hand side. 17. Side
impact sensor, C-post on left-hand side. 18. Seat belt buckle, left front seat. 19. Seat belt tensioner,
B-post on left-hand side. 20. Side impact sensor, B-post on the left-hand side.
Page 537
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1313
Check the voltage between B1 and B3. The voltage should be approximately 12V. Check the
voltage between B2 and B3. The voltage should be approximately 5V. Check voltage between B3
and battery negative lead. The voltage should be approximately 0V. If voltages measured above
are OK, the fault is in the cruise-control switch unit.
- To connect the test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Steering Wheel Buttons For RTI (Road Traffic Information)
Page 634

Page 1027
Page 348
Central electrical unit engine/transmission control module (ECM/TCM).
Relay box in passenger compartment/cargo compartment. See Connector relay box, repair See:
Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connector Relay Box, Repair.
Page 1198
Fault symptom[s]
- RTI switch unit does not work.
Checking the RTI Switch

Checking the RTI switch
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:

Page 365
Primary locking
Secondary locking

Connector Type 3
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Page 321
54/16 Connector
54/20 Connector
54/21 Connector
54/24 Connector
54/25 Connector
Page 1183
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
- To access the cruise control switch, see RTI switch See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted
Controls Assembly/Service and Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 676
Remove:
- the screw from the rear edge
- front edge from the hook on the member and remove the base section.
Installation
- Position the bottom section and the air intake on the air pipe at the windshield washer fluid filler
pipe.
Exposing And Removing The Relay Box In The Passenger Compartment
Exposing And Removing The Relay Box In The Passenger compartment
NOTE: For cars with Volvo On Call (see the carphone keypad), the battery negative lead must be
disconnected first. Otherwise an automatic alarm call may be made to the emergency services.
mileage.
car. VADIS reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct software
NOTE: Key codes must be programmed before the central electronic module will accept the keys
that belong to the car. This is carried out in "Add / Remove keys" via VADIS vehicle
communication.
Page 683
Relay location
Page 1441
Control Module: Description and Operation Downloading Software and Replacing the Control
Module
New software can be downloaded into the transmission control module (TCM). When ordering
software, the hardware and the software in the car is compared to the data in the Volvo central
database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module. If the
comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated with
the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded. For further information
regarding downloading, see Design and Function, Downloading Software.
Page 1170
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1361
Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
Connecting the breakout box
Special tools:
951 1463 Adapter 22-16-14 pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1463 Adapter 22-16-14 Pin 951
1428 Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box 951 1508 Adapter 10-7-5
pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1508 Adapter 10-7-5 Pin
- Ignition off
- Expose the steering wheel module (SWM) according to Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing
See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair.
Check that the male and female terminals on the unit connectors are undamaged and secure
(cannot be pressed in). Check that the cables to the female terminals are secured to the terminal
pins. Connect adapter951 1463 Adapter 22-16-14 pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1463 Adapter
22-16-14 Pin to the control module connector (wiring side). Connect the breakout box 951 1428
Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box to the adapter. steering wheel
module (SWM) terminals #A1-#A22 correspond to #1-#22 on the breakout box. If the contact reel is
to be checked, connect adapter951 1508 Adapter 10-7-5 pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1508
Adapter 10-7-5 Pin to breakout box951 1428 Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428
Breakout Box. Contact reel terminals #B1-#B5 correspond to #26-#30 on the breakout box. The
breakout box is designed to facilitate reading off the control module input and output signals when
the control module is connected; and the cable and component resistance when the control module
is disconnected. The use of a breakout box reduces the risk of accidental short-circuited cables
and damage to the connector pins. For further information about signals and other values, see
Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Signal Specification, Steering
Wheel Module (SWM).
Parameter, Digital Display
Parameter, digital display

Hint: If certain values are to be updated, the engine should be running.
Page 756
- Remove the clip (1) at the side of the left-hand side cushion
- Pull the top edge of the left front cargo compartment panel out to access the upper lock for the
side cushion
- Repeat the operation on the right-hand side.
Applies to the S60
- Remove the left-hand side cushion. First press in the catches (1) at the top edge of the reverse of
the side cushion. Pull the cushion out slightly
- Grasp the cushion using both hands. Twist counter-clockwise until the catches on the inside
release
- Remove the side cushion. First pull out the upper edge of the side cushion. Then pull upwards
Applies to the S80
- Insert your hand down the side of the lower section of the side cushion. Remove the left-hand
side cushion
- Release the catches. At the same time lift the side cushion
- Place the cushion to one side
Applies to the V70

Page 1087
Other Relays
Page 411
. Test the function.
Page 659
compartment.

Page 188
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 322
54/32 Connector
54/34 Connector
54/35 Connector
54/37 Connector
54/39 Connector
Page 1377
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 422
Check:
- that the control module is of the correct type (this depends on whether the car is equipped with
STC or not)
- that none of the pins or sockets on the connector are damaged
- that there are no contaminants on the mating surfaces between the control module and the ABS
hydraulic modulator
- that no part of the control module seals remain on the ABS hydraulic modulator valves.
Installation
Install the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 214
2/118 Rear Power Window Relay
2/119 Right Rear Power Window Down Relay
2/120 Relay - Power Windows, Power Child Lock Rear Door
2/138-139 Deadlock Relay, LH/RH Rear Door
2/152 Relay, Daytime Running Lights

Page 1460
The control valve/axial solenoid are in the coupling unit for the Active On-demand Coupling (AOC).
The axial solenoid receives a constant pulse width modulated (PWM) signal from the control
module. The control signal from the control module is used by the solenoid to change the position
of the control valve. This regulates the pressure to the operating piston in the multi-plate clutch.
Four wheel drive is disabled if there is a fault in the control valve/axial solenoid. There are
diagnostics for the control valve/axial solenoid.
Electrical feed pump
The electrical feed pump is integrated in the coupling unit and is powered by the differential
electronic module (DEM). When the engine is started and exceeds 400 rpm, the electrical feed
pump receives power from the control unit. The feed pump pumps oil to the annular pistons, whose
rollers move into contact with the cam disc. At the same time the oil flows to the operating piston,
so that the play in the multi-plate clutch unit is eliminated. The coupling is then able to react rapidly
and regulate as required. Four wheel drive is disengaged if there is a fault in the feed pump. There
are diagnostics for the feed pump.
Function Electronic function

Page 723
Applies to the V70
- Remove the foldable panels on the left and right-hand sides of the cargo compartment.
Applies to the V70
- Remove the cover and the screw from the front edge of the left-hand side panel. Remove the
left-hand side panel
- Fold the panel inwards. Lift the panel out
Applies to the V70
Applies to the V70

Page 591
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 764
- Drill a - 4 mm (5/32") hole in the side member, through the front hole in the bracket
- Remove any swarf. Rust-proof the hole edge.
Applies to the V70
- Ensure that the cable harness, previously routed over the side member, is positioned as close to
the rear crossmember as possible. This is to prevent the cable harness being trapped by the floor
support or the two support feet for the floor support
electronic module. Use the three M6 screws. Tighten the screws. Tighten to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.)
Applies to cars equipped with a Diversity antenna amplifier
- Wrap foam tape around the cable / wiring for the antenna amplifier.
- Take the accessory electronic module from the kit. Connect the cable and connector previously
routed along the right-hand side member.

Page 910
20/33 Shunt, Parking Light/tail Light REM
20/34 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Right
20/39 Shunt, Cargo Compartment 12 V Outlet
31/No. Ground Connection

Page 25
YES - Reading off audio module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication problems
Selecting car model
1. S40 (04-) / V50. 2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC
and S70 / C70. 4. S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
3 - car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
Page 1161
-------------------------------------------------
Change direction indicator switch.
Other information:
- Turn signal switch, replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the direction indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
No - Checking the windshield wiper switch
-------------------------------------------------
Try replacing the control module.
Other information
- Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and
Repair
Page 1189
Check the voltage between terminals #B1 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 12 V. Check
the voltage between terminals #B2 and #B3. Voltage should be approximately 5 V. Check the
voltage between terminal #B3 and the battery negative terminal. Voltage should be approximately 0
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Error Message

Page 1179
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]

Page 798
Lift the control module out of the bracket to access the connectors.
Hint: On V70 and V70XC, it may be necessary to angle the control module downwards and
forwards to access the connectors.
Disconnecting the connectors
Press the catch (A) and pull the lock handle backwards. Pull the connector out of the control
module. Disconnect the small connector from the control module. Replace the control module.
Installation
Installing the connectors
Install the large connector on the control module. Lock the connector using the lock handle above
the catch (A). Install the other connector.
Page 196
Other Relays
Page 921
54/4 Connector
54/7 Connector
54/8 Connector
54/9 Connector
54/10 Connector
Page 1145
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation Function
Function
Controlling functions and menu selection using the steering wheel buttons
See:
- Design and Function, audio module (AUM). Applies to S60, V70, V70XC/XC70 and S80
- Design and Function, audio module (AUD). Applies to XC90
- Design and Function, Road traffic information system (RTI). Applies to S60, V70, V70XC/XC70
and S80
- Design and Function, multimedia module (MMM). Applies to XC90
- Design and Function, engine management system
- Design and Function, phone module (PHM).
Controlling the headlamps and turn signal lamps
See Design and Function, central electronic module (CEM).
Horn
Windshield wiper and washer functions
Trip computer and displaying/erasing text messages
The left-hand control stalk is used to control the trip computer and to display and erase text
messages in the driver information module (DIM) (5/1). The steering wheel module (SWM) (3/130)
transmits information to the driver information module (DIM) on the Control area network (CAN)
indicating which function is selected. The trip computer menu is controlled using the ring on the
left-hand control stalk. Turn the ring forwards or backwards to scroll through the menu one step at
a time. Some menu selections, such as average speed and fuel consumption, can be reset using
the RESET button. Error messages displayed in the driver information module display are erased
using the READ button. For additional information about the trip computer and text messages, see
Design and Function, driver information module (DIM).
Page 740
Note!
- Steps 1 - 16 apply to S60 and S80.
- Steps 17 - 39 apply to V70.

equipment.
- Remove the cargo compartment carpet.
- Remove the clips from the lower edge of the folding panel by pressing in the clip centre until there
is an audible click.
- Remove the clips.

Page 299
17/19 12 V Outlet, Cargo Compartment
18/4 Contact Reel
20/3-7 Spark Plug And Ignition Coil
20/16 Capacitor
20/22-26 Glow Plug

Page 850
7/16 Coolant Temperature Sensor
7/17 Mass Airflow Sensor MAF
7/23 Rear Knock Sensor
7/23-24 Rear/Front Knock Sensor

Page 330
EXT.D = Extended electrical distribution
HISPEED = High speed data bus
L.E = Late edition
LH = Left-hand side
LHD = Left-hand drive
LOSPEED = Low speed data bus
MAN = Manual transmission
ME7 = Fuel control system, gasoline, turbo
PCL = Power Child Lock
REM = Rear Electronic Module
RH = Right-hand side
RHD = Right-hand drive
RTI = Road Traffic Information
SRS = Airbag
STC = Stability Traction Control
TELE = Mobile telephone
TURBO = Turbo engine
W/O = Without
Colors
BL = Blue
BN = Brown
GN = Green
GR = Gray
OR = Orange
P = Pink
R = Red
SB = Black
VO = Violet
W = White
Y = Yellow
Relays, General
Relays, General
Diagram Legend, See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Diagram Legend
Wire Color Code Identification and other Abbreviations, See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and
Service and Repair
Entertainment System Control Module: Service and Repair
Entertainment equipment
TV receiver, replacing
Removal
- Remove the front floor hatch from the cargo compartment
- Fold up the short backrest
- Slacken off the front and rear screws for the receiver. Lift the receiver up
- Disconnect the connectors.
NOTE: The DIN connector and terminal on the receiver are marked yellow.
Installation
- Lightly tighten the screws for the receiver
- Install the connector.
NOTE: The DIN connector and terminal on the receiver are marked yellow.
- Install the receiver. Tighten the screws
- Reposition the backrest
- Install the front floor hatch.

Recall - Brake Light Relay Replacement
Brake Lamp Relay: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall - Brake Light Relay Replacement
V70 (01-)/V70 XC (01-) 2002
Section
Group
36
No 0024
Year 2004
Month
02
Recall Campaign No.131 Brake Light Relay
Background:
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC and Volvo Cars of Canada, Ltd. have decided that a defect
related to motor vehicle safety exists in the rear left and right brake light relays of certain model
year 2002 V70 and V70 XC (Cross Country) vehicles. In some cases, the brake lights may not
function when the brake pedal is depressed or may stay on continuously. In both cases, the high
positioned brake light and all other tail lights will not be affected.
The corrective action will be to replace the brake relay with two relays of a modified design.
Competence requirement
Volvo Level 1 Technician

Material
Relay 2 8651661
Service: All affected vehicles must have two new relays installed in the rear electronic module
(REM) as described below.
Removing the original relay 1
Remove the left rear cargo compartment trim panel in order to access the Rear Electronic Module.
With the ignition off, REMOVE the RELAY installed in position RMI 5 and position RMI 6 in the
REM, which controls both brake lights and the rear fog light as shown.
Installing replacement relays 2
Install TWO new relays, part number 8651661 in the REM positions RMI 5 and RMI 6 as shown.
Page 950
Connector, see Connectors, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 4
Page 1171
Check the voltage between terminals #B1 and #B3. Voltage must be approximately 12 V. Check
the voltage between terminals #B2 and #B3. Voltage must be approximately 5 V. Check the
voltage between terminal #B3 and the battery negative terminal. Voltage must be approximately 0
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 793
Switch off the ignition.
Remove the left side panel in the cargo compartment. Release the integrated relay/fusebox. Lift the
catch by the upper edge and angle out the integrated relay/fusebox.
Page 472
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1002
INTRODUCTION
-
NOTE! Read through the whole installation instruction before starting the work.
- The front page gives the date of this edition and the edition it replaces
- The second page shows the tools needed for the installation and the contents of the installation
kit
- The illustrations display the procedure in order of operation. The order of operation is repeated in
the text section
- Cut out the text page in order to follow the illustrations and text at the same time.
Connector holder
- Mark the hole for the connector bracket for drilling as illustrated.
- Pre-drill with a smaller drill bit. Enlarge the hole with a -6.5 mm (1/4")" drill bit.
- Remove any swarf. Rust-proof the edges of the holes.

Page 893
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 789

Page 335
Checking female socket terminals and male pin terminals Greasing female terminals
Inspect terminals visually
Repair wiring and cable terminals as required, using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Using a loose male connector, test to see if the female connector provides a good contact and
that the pin remains in place when the male connector is pulled lightly
- Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during measurement to locate damage.
Open-Circuit, Intermittent Faults
Open-circuit, Intermittent faults
An open-circuit in a cable will be indicated by the loss of a function (or functions). Chafed and
broken leads are common causes of faults. Repair wiring and cable terminals as required, using
appropriate procedures. Checks:
Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually".
[ohm] if there is no open-circuit in the cable. Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during
measurement to locate the damage.
Page 640
Relay Box: Application and ID Fuse/Relay Identification and Location
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 255
8/38-41 Shift Solenoid 1, 2 Lock-Up Solenoid, Pressure Solenoid
8/44 Canister Shut-off Valve
8/51-52 FL/FR Side Airbag Igniter
8/51-52 FL And FR Side Airbag Igniter

Accessory Electronic Module (AEM)
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Accessory Electronic Module (AEM)

Page 1234
Road traffic information (RTI) up button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) up button is depressed. Not activated
Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) down button, status
This value indicates whether the RTI down button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) enter button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) enter button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) reset button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) reset button is depressed. Not
activated Activated
Windscreen washer, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the washer position. Not
activated Activated
High speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the high speed position. Not
activated Activated
Low speed position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the low speed position. Not
activated Activated
Intermittent position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the intermittent position. Not
activated Activated
Single sweep position, status
This value indicates whether the windscreen wiper lever is activated in the single sweep position.
Not activated Activated
Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description
Frozen values steering wheel module, description
Explanation
Not all the parameters described need to be implemented in the control module. This varies from
system to system. Frozen values are parameter values that are stored when a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) is stored.
Battery voltage, value

Locations
Headlamp Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 1168
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 298
16/78 Speaker, Mobile Telephone
16/79 Bass Speaker V70
16/50,54 LH And RH Rear Window Antenna
17/13 Data Link Connector
17/17 Jump Start Connection

Page 794
compartment.

Page 452
Test run the heater. Check the function of the heater. See Engine coolant heater, test running See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Auxiliary Cabin Heater/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Engine Coolant Heater, Test Running. Check that no diagnostic trouble codes
(DTC) have been stored during the repair work.
Install:
- the two upper screws (as illustrated) and the center screw on the left hand slide mounting
- the bumper cover. See (S80), Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (V70), Casing,
bumper front, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair (V70XC) or Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (S60)
- the air baffle
- the battery lead. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting.
Page 1230
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Intermittent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Intermittent fault
Checking the power supply and ground for the control module
Check steering wheel module connector A. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Check fuse
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse was
blown, check the circuit after the fuse. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Check the cable
for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment fusebox and the control module
terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the ground lead between control module
#A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit. Check ground terminal 31/84. Check
for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access the control module, see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering
Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 1425
The following components are included in the control system for automatic transmissions: -
Transmission control module (TCM) - Controls activation and deactivation of the solenoids by
processing the signals from components such as the transmission input and output speed sensors
and the temperature sensor. Also stores adaptive data as well as diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
and frozen values for diagnostics
- Shift solenoid, S1 - Controls shifting in the transmission
- Lock-up solenoid, SLU - Controls the lock-up function and is also used for certain shifts
- Line pressure solenoid, SLT - Controls the transmission line pressure and neutral control
- Line pressure solenoid, SLS - Controls the transmission shifting pressure and is activated for
certain gears
- Transmission input speed sensor (input shaft speed) (1) - Provides the transmission control
module (TCM) with information about the input shaft speed from the engine
- Speed sensor (output shaft speed) (2) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with
information about the output shaft speed from the transmission
- Oil temperature sensor (3) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with information
about the oil temperature of the transmission
- Gear-shift position sensor (4) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with information
about the selected gear position
- Gear selector module (GSM) - Provides the transmission control module (TCM) with information
about the Geartronic mode and winter mode (W) amongst others.
Signals
Page 575
Other Relays
Page 236
6/62 LH Power Door Mirror
6/63 RH Power Door Mirror
6/64 Passenger Seat Motor, Backrest Angle
6/65 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/down Front Edge
6/66 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/down Rear Edge

Testing and Inspection
Trailer Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection
Connecting the Volvo Communication Tool 2000 (VCT 2000)
In order to be able communicate with the car control modules, the VCT 2000 must be connected to
both the VIDA PC and the car data link connector (DLC).
-------------------------------------------------
Page 703
Note!
- Steps 1 - 16 apply to S60 and S80.
- Steps 17 - 39 apply to V70.

equipment.
- Remove the clips from the lower edge of the folding panel by pressing in the clip centre until there
is an audible click.
- Remove the clips.

Page 742
- Connect the red (R) cable to position 22.

Page 468
- Remove the switches.
- Install in reverse order.

Page 984
Page 1269
Were any defects found?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the windshield wiper switch
If there is a malfunction on the wiper switch or its connector in the Steering wheel module (SWM)
this may affect the direction indicator function. Disconnect the wiper lever and see if the direction
indicator function starts to work. Remedy as necessary.
Other information
- Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and
Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
- No steering wheel module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the central electronic
module.
- No diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the steering wheel module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate washer.

Page 467
- Release the catches. Pull off the panel
- The panel has double sided adhesive tape. Ensure that any remains of the tape are removed
from the black panel.
- Remove the backing from the tape on the panel and press the panel into place.
Finishing After replacing the control module, the following must be carried out.
- Reprogram the customer programmed data
- Carry out self-adjustment of the damper motor end positions
- Test drive the car. Check that the function of the climate control system is OK
- Then check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the replacement.
Information about programming the control module, damper motor self-adjustment and reading off
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be found under VADIS communication.
Dashboard environment panel switches

Page 1128
Steering Column Control Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System Overview
Control module
The steering wheel module (SWM) has the task of managing the signals for those functions which
can be controlled via the steering wheel control stalks and buttons. The signals are transmitted to
the relevant control modules via the control area network (CAN). The actual functions are not in the
steering wheel module (SWM).
The steering wheel module (SWM) manages the control signals for the following functions:
- Volume control and CD track / radio selection.
- Volume control during hands free carphone calls and menu selection for the phone module
(PHM).
- Menu selection for traffic information.
- Front windshield wipers/washers.
- Rear windshield wiper/washer (V70, V70XC/XC70 and XC90).
- Cruise control.
- Turn signal lamps.
- High and low beam.
- Trip computer and displaying / erasing text messages in the driver information module (DIM).
removed to replace the control module.
Control stalks, key pads and switches can be replaced as separate units.
Cars with DSTC also have a steering wheel angle sensor installed in the contact reel in the
steering wheel module (SWM).
The steering wheel module (SWM) communicates with directly connected components and
communicates with other control modules via the Control Area Network (CAN).
The control module checks activations and input and output signals via an integrated diagnostic
system. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module detects an error. In certain
cases the control module replaces the faulty signal with a substitute signal.
Any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the control module memory. This information
can be read off using VADIS via the data link connector (DLC) in the car.
A simple way to ensure that the steering wheel module (SWM) is powered and grounded is to flash
the headlamp high beam or to change the audio or carphone volume.
For further information, also see Signal specifications. See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Signal Description /
Specification
Signals
The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the steering wheel
module (SWM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication
and Controller area network (CAN) communication. The following illustration displays the same
Page 848
6/105 Fuel Distributor, Gas
6/120 Engine Throttle Body
7/4 Brake Fluid Level Sensor
7/5 Washer Fluid Level Sensor
7/6 Oil Pressure Sensor

Page 166
Ordering software
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair. Test operate the seat.
Check all the functions.
Page 163

Page 818
2/34 Fog Light Relay
2/35 Starter Motor Relay
2/49 Relay, Rear Fog Light
2/59 Unlocking Relay, Fuel Filler Flap

Page 1439
available.
Limp-home mode
The warning lamp in the combined instrument panel comes on or a text message is displayed for
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the transmission control module (TCM). The
transmission control module (TCM) interrupts the activation of all solenoids. This means that no
shifting is possible. The transmission operates only in 3rd gear in positions 3 and L, 4th gear in
position D and reverse in position R. Shifting can only be carried out manually between 3rd and 4th
gear and reverse gear. No control of line pressure solenoids SLS and SLT. Maximum system
pressure constantly which results in harsh upshifting and downshifting and harsher shifts when
engaging P-R, N-R and N-D.
Page 1310
- Ignition off.
- Disconnect RTI switch unit.
- Ignition on.
result the fault is in the RTI switch unit.
- To access RTI switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 230
4/201-202 LH And RH Seat Heater Control Module
5/1 Combined Instrument Panel DIM
6/1 Windshield Wiper Motor
6/2 Windshield Washer Pump

Page 295
16/57,58 Speaker, LH And RH D-pillar
16/60 Integrated Mobile Telephone PHM

Page 210
2/61 Relay, Parking Light
2/72 Relay, Rear Window Wiper

Page 653
- Remove the outlet air pipe from the distribution box

- Remove the 3 clips. Use a screwdriver. Remove the intermediate section
- Remove the power steering fluid reservoir and the coolant reservoir. Lift them up
- Remove the intermediate section.
The connector with cable and cable protector

Page 1223
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected
terminal. To connect the breakout box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and
Page 525
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 637
Relay Box: Locations Relays, Fuse Boxes and Wiring
Relays, Fuse Boxes And Wiring
1. Integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo compartment, rear electronic module 2. Relay box in the
passenger compartment, central electronic module (CEM) 3. Fusebox in the passenger
compartment 4. Integrated relay/fusebox in engine compartment 5. Cable harness 6. Ground cable,
battery.
Page 182
Remove the headlining according to Headlining, replacing
Remove the 8 screws.
There are two reference holes. One is round and the other is oval.
Lift up the sun roof.
Insert a drift that matches the diameter of the hole
Adjust the sunroof so that it is level at the sides and has even pressure at the front and rear edges.
Test the function of the sun roof by opening and closing it as far as it will go.
Calibrate Sun roof module (SRM).

Page 620

Page 1282
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1152
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
communicated with. If communication is not possible
Page 1251
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1073

Page 41
Vehicle Communication Information, Audio Module (AUM)
Description of reading extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information
Contents

Page 939
EXT.D = Extended electrical distribution
HISPEED = High speed data bus
L.E = Late edition
LH = Left-hand side
LHD = Left-hand drive
LOSPEED = Low speed data bus
MAN = Manual transmission
ME7 = Fuel control system, gasoline, turbo
PCL = Power Child Lock
REM = Rear Electronic Module
RH = Right-hand side
RHD = Right-hand drive
RTI = Road Traffic Information
SRS = Airbag
STC = Stability Traction Control
TELE = Mobile telephone
TURBO = Turbo engine
W/O = Without
Colors
BL = Blue
BN = Brown
GN = Green
GR = Gray
OR = Orange
P = Pink
R = Red
SB = Black
VO = Violet
W = White
Y = Yellow
Relays, General
Relays, General
Diagram Legend, See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and Instructions/Diagram Legend
Wire Color Code Identification and other Abbreviations, See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and
Page 902
16/26 Central Dashboard Speaker
16/35 Alarm Siren SCM
16/36 TV Receiver
16/45 RTI Control Module
16/46 RTI Display

Page 750
- Press in the catch on the grey connector on the rear of the fuse holder in the cargo compartment,
turn the lock arm up as far as it will go and pull out the connector.

Page 270
10/70 LH Low Beam
10/114-115 LH/RH Vanity Mirror Lighting
10/114-115 LH And RH Vanity Mirror Lighting
10/125 LH Front Courtesy Lighting

Page 213
2/112 Unlocking Relay, LH Rear
2/114 Unlocking Relay, RH Rear
2/115 Relay, Deadlock, Rear Doors
2/116 Rear Power Window Up Relay
2/117 Right Rear Power Window Up Relay

Page 1440
Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module (TCM) Diagnostic
Functions
Transmission control module (TCM) diagnostic functions General
The control module has a built-in diagnostic system, the Volvo on-board diagnostic (OBD) system.
This system continuously monitors its own system and the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
The control module will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if it detects a fault. If a fault
disappears for any reason after the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been permanently stored in
the control module, information about the fault remains stored in the control module.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
Stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be read off and erased using this function. Diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased when all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
read at least once.
Reading off input and output signals
Using this function, the status of the control module input and output signals can be continuously
read off. For further information about parameters, see Description of parameters
Activating components
This function allows components to be activated so that their functions can be checked. For further
information about activations, see Description of activations
Reading off the control module identification
VADIS identifies the control modules by reading off a number of codes from the control module
memory. The codes contain the following information about the control module: -
the hardware P/N (control modules without software)
- the hardware serial number (control modules without software)

- the software P/N
- the diagnostic software P/N

Page 1295
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 232
6/17 Driver Seat Motor, Up/down Front Edge
6/18 Driver Seat Motor, Up/down Rear Edge
6/19 Driver Seat Motor, Forward/backward
6/20 Passenger Seat Motor, Forward/backward
6/25 Starter Motor

Page 1127
Steering Column Control Module: Description and Operation Function
Trip Computer And Displaying/erasing Text Messages
The left-hand control stalk is used to control the trip computer and to display and erase text
messages in the driver information module (DIM) (5/1). The steering wheel module (SWM) (3/130)
transmits information to the driver information module (DIM) on the Control area network (CAN)
indicating which function is selected.
The trip computer menu is controlled using the ring on the left-hand control stalk. Turn the ring
forwards or backwards to scroll through the menu one step at a time. Some menu selections, such
as average speed and fuel consumption, can be reset using the RESET button.
Error messages displayed in the driver information module display are erased using the READ
button.
Page 663
- Disconnect the electrical box from the spring strut housing by pressing it in towards the engine
compartment.
Removal
Location of fuse, 11B

Page 381
Primary lock
Tool to remove the center cable terminals, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully
backwards.
Page 581
(DTCs).
The upper electronic module is integrated in the rear view mirror. To remove the rear view mirror.
Replacing the upper electronic module or the rear view mirror Preparations
software.
- Remove the lens
HINT: Only certain versions of the upper electronic module have a ground lead.

Page 879
10/70 LH Low Beam
10/114-115 LH And RH Vanity Mirror Lighting
10/125 LH Front Courtesy Lighting

Page 430
The table above summarizes input and output signals to and from the Steering wheel angle sensor
control module. The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication
and Controller area network (CAN) communication.
Design
Control module for the steering wheel angle sensor
After initiation, with the ignition key in position II and when the steering wheel is turned 4.5 degrees
in any direction, the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor continuously transmits
information about the steering wheel angle position to the brake control unit to calculate the driving
style of the driver. The brake control module was called ABS-control module up to and including
model year 2001.
Communication between the Steering wheel angle sensor control module and the brake control
module occurs on the high speed side of the Controller area network (CAN). The control module for
the steering wheel angle sensor is positioned on a bracket inside the central electronic module.
Page 831
3/95 Spin Control Switch
3/111 Light Switch Module LSM

Page 1311
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1207
Checking the steering wheel buttons for RTI (road traffic information)
Checking the connector
- Ignition off.
Cars manufactured between 199943 - 200143 may have defective or bent terminal pins in the
connector which connect the wiring from the RTI (road traffic information) switch to the buttons on
the right-hand side of the steering wheel. As a result the ENTER and DOWN steering wheel
buttons for the road traffic information module (RTI) do not work. Check the connection to the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel for bent or defective terminal pins. Replace the keypad if a
fault is found. Remedy as necessary
Other
- To access or replace the keypad unit on the steering wheel module (SWM), see Keypad unit,
steering wheel, replacing See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Sensors and Switches -
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Assembly/Service and
Repair/Keypad Unit, Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Page 894
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38
Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 375
Page 1438
For further information, see Design and Function, central electronic module (CEM).
Adaptation data
There are two functions for adaptation in the transmission control module (TCM) software which
can be activated: -
Resetting adaptation - carried out after replacing internal components or the entire transmission
- Adaptation function - This function helps the mechanic to adapt the transmission. It makes it
easier to reset the function of the transmission after repair or replacement of, for example: -
the transmission control system
- the transmission fluid
- the entire transmission
- the transmission control module (TCM).
When the adaptation function has been activated, the test drive instructions must be followed. The
following shifts can be adapted: -
1-2
- 2-3
- 3-4
- 4-5
- N-D
- 5-4
- 4-3
- 3-2
- 2-1
- N-R Neutral Control engagement and
- Neutral Control engagement and disengagement, if equipped.
While the car is in this mode, the orange/yellow warning lamp in the center of the combined
instrument panel is used to indicate when each shift has been adapted to its target value. When the
orange/yellow warning lamp (triangle) flashes after each of the listed shifts, the adaptation is
complete.
Note: The function is only available in certain software versions.
Adaptation of the transmission is activated via the VADIS vehicle communication socket.
Counter for transmission fluid data
A counter for transmission oil quality is built into the software for the transmission control module
(TCM). The counter counts up the amount of time the oil is above a certain temperature. When the
counter has reached the maximum value, the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for an oil change is
stored in the control module. When replacing transmission fluid the counter must be reset to
prevent a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) being stored incorrectly. This applies when the
transmission fluid is changed and when the fluid is changed during a repair. The reset function is
activated via the VADIS vehicle communication socket.
Emergency mode in the event of a fault
An emergency program is activated to deal with the fault when the transmission control module
(TCM) detects a transmission fault (permanent fault). If the transmission control module (TCM)
detects a permanent fault, an emergency mode is activated. The transmission control module
(TCM) then implements corrective action to protect the transmission, while leaving the car in the
best possible drivable condition. Minor malfunctions do not activate an emergency program. There
are different programs depending on the type of fault: -
Emergency mode
- Limp-home mode.
Emergency mode is activated for minor faults and the Limp-home mode for the most serious faults.
If the malfunction is intermittent, the transmission control module (TCM) returns to normal operation
the next time the ignition is switched on.
Emergency mode
The warning lamp in the combined instrument panel comes on and a or text message is displayed
for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the transmission control module (TCM). The
transmission shifts in all gears but transmits no signal to the lock-up solenoid. This means that
lock-up is not
Page 56
Page 1215
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
- Windscreen wipers operate at low speed.
Checking the Windscreen-Wiper Switch
Checking the windscreen-wiper switch
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault is not in the
SWM.
Page 280
Fuses 11A/1-7
11A/No. Main Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box
11B Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Page 1261
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 269
10/64 RH High Beam
10/66 RH Low Beam
10/68 LH High Beam

Page 922
54/11 Connector
54/12 Connector
54/13 Connector
54/14 Connector
54/16 Connector
Page 777
- Open the catch for the left-hand side panel in the cargo compartment. Fold down the upholstery
If necessary: -
Remove the floor hatch in the cargo compartment
- remove the clips on the floor. Remove the upholstery
- remove the road traffic information module (RTI), see Road traffic information module (RTI),
replacing See: Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation
Module/Service and Repair.
- remove the CD changer. See CD player, replacing See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Compact Disc Player (CD)/Service and Repair.
Replacing relays, shunts and fuses
- Expose the relay and fuse box, see instruction Exposing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
- Replace the relay, shunt and/or fuse.
Relay location
Page 1353
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading control unit id
2 - Checking communication fault
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication fault
Selecting car model
1. Car model S40 (04-) / V50 2. Car model V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90 3.
Car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70 4. Checking communication errors car model S40
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Page 1473
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 421
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing the Control Module for ABS and
Dynamic Stability and Traction Control (DSTC)
Replacing the control module for ABS and dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC)
Preparation
Disconnect the battery lead
See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and

Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing
See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2 See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS
Unit, Replacing.
Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
See Replacing the brake pipe between the hydraulic unit, front wheel and junction , B5254T2 See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Replacing the
Brake Pipe Between the Hydraulic Unit, Front Wheel and Junction.
Removal
Remove the control module
Remove:
Carefully lift the control module.
Check the control module

Page 1191
-------------------------------------------------
Activate reset button on indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the
indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
no - Replacing the component
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Page 608
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 733
- Slacken off the screw holding the connector so that it releases from the threads. Check that the
screw is free with your fingers.
- Use pliers to disconnect the connector. Grip the screw and pull it straight outwards so that the
connector and cover follow.
- Remove all relays and shunts bridged to the control module. Note the locations.
Page 1281
- Ignition off.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 120
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 352
Primary lock
Page 189
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 351
Tool or951 2639 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2639 Terminal Removal
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Control Module for Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), Repair
Connector control module for Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1442
Control Module: Service and Repair
Transmission control module (TCM), replacing
Points to observe when replacing the control module
Caution! Software can only be ordered when the control module is installed in the vehicle. VIDA
Caution! Wait two minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The main relay must be
voltage-free before the control module can be removed from the car. If the engine cooling fan runs
on after the ignition has been switched off, wait until it stops. Then wait another two minutes.
Caution! Always check that the control module and control module box connector pins and sleeves
are not bent or damaged. This may have caused the fault.
Remove:
- the cable from the battery negative terminal. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
- the cover over the control module.

Page 1070
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1190
Checking the error message
Note! Many serious error messages cannot be erased from the display window. This remains in the
display window until the error concerned has been dealt with.
Does the error message indicate a serious error?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the indicator switch
Activate the read and reset button on the indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.

-------------------------------------------------
Replacing.

Page 1272
Checking SWM control unit
Before continuing with trouble-shooting it is important to take note of the following:
- All tests for the current system should have been done.
- No faults should be found in the components, connectors or wires etc.
Have all the tests been done without finding any faults?
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1345
2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70. 4.
S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
3 - Car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1199
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Page 1369
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 474
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 636
Other Relays
Page 1409
Page 342
Connector door, see Connector door, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 5
Page 36
malfunction.
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.

Page 1459
The differential electronic module (DEM) is secured directly to the coupling unit housing and forms
a single unit with the axial solenoid. The axial solenoid controls the control valve. The differential
electronic module (DEM) receives signals from the engine control module (ECM), the central
electronic module (CEM) and the brake control module (BCM) via the high speed side of the
control area network (CAN). The differential electronic module (DEM) uses these signals to
determine the oil pressure required for the multiplate clutch in the coupling unit. The oil pressure for
the multi-plate clutch determines the amount of torque which can be transferred to the rear wheels.
Four wheel drive is not available if there is a fault in the differential electronic module (DEM).
Oil pressure and temperature sensor
The oil pressure and temperature sensor in the clutch unit are close to the axial solenoid in the
housing for the differential control module (DEM). The sensor is flushed with hydraulic fluid. The
sensor gauges the temperature and pressure of the hydraulic fluid (measurement range 0-4 MPa).
The sensor transmits signals about temperature and pressure to the control module. The control
module uses the temperature and pressure signals to adapt the function of the system, changing
the temperature, and therefore the viscosity, of the fluid as required. If the temperature of the fluid
exceeds 100°C there is no pressure in the coupling and all wheel drive is disengaged. When the
temperature falls below 100°C the coupling is pressurized again. If the oil pressure exceeds 7.4
MPa, the safety valve in the coupling opens. The coupling is pressurized again when the oil
pressure drops below 7.4 M Pa. Four wheel drive is not available if there is a fault in the pressure
and/or temperature sensor. There are diagnostics for the oil pressure and temperature sensor.
Control valve/axial solenoid

Page 1321
Was the status of the turn signal lamp switch correct?
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Navigation System - SW Upgrade Disc Guide
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - SW Upgrade Disc Guide
Title New SW upgrade disc for RTI: Quick guide (MMM MMV+, MMM2)
Ref.No US6514.1.11 en-GB
Issuer -
Partner 3 US7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group 3960
Func Desc accessories
Status Released
Reference VIDA fault tracing information
Attachment
@TJ16514110121-001b
Vehicle Type
@TJ16514110121-001c
CSC
DTC
Text
CSC = Customer symptom code RTI = Road and Traffic In formation MMM = Multi media Module
Note!
If using a printed copy of this document, always check for the latest online version.
NOTE!
THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDES THE PREVIOUS RETAILER TECHNICAL JOURNAL 16514,

DATED 06-30-2010. PLEASE UPDATE YOUR FILES.
Changes to this document are:

^ Jan 2011: Note added In regards to SW application disc included in service disc kit 31310029
does not contain the latest SW version
^ June: 2010 New SW upgrade discs for MMM2 (version10w22) and MMM+ (version 10w22)
^ January 2010 New SW upgrade disc for MMM2 (version 0948) New information is in red italics.
This service disc contains an update to prevent a check sum error which, if it occurs, will
permanently disable the MMM. This condition is rare. Once it occurs it cannot be corrected by
loading the service upgrade.
^ July 2009: New SW upgrade disc for MMM2 (version 0920) Updated Contains 3D map feature
and SW optimization for repeated Traffic message audio warning "traffic restrictions may apply,
please respect the local traffic regulation"
Page 344
Connector Type 3
Connector, see Connectors, repair See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connectors, Repair.

Page 44
ohms The ohmmeter should read approximately 0.
OK - Fault Found
Not OK - contact resistance and oxidation
-------------------------------------------------
Checking for open-circuits, contact resistance and oxidation
Check ground terminal 31/84 and the wiring connected to it. Check for an open-circuit according to
Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent
Fault. Check for contact resistance and oxidation according to Checking wiring and terminals.
Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking
Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault.
Page 184
Remove:
- the upper electronic module (UEM). See Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM),
replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair
- the first connector
- 1 screw.
Detach the control module and lift it down.
Remove:
- the second connector
- the control module for the sun roof.
Installing the sun roof control module
Note! For tightening torques, see relevant specfications.
Install:
- the small connector
- 1 M6 screw. Tighten
- the large connector
- the upper electronic module (UEM). See Interior lighting and upper electronic module (UEM),
replacing See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair.
Calibrate the control module for the sun roof. See Sun roof module (SRM), calibrating See: Body
and Frame/Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Sun Roof Module (SRM), Calibrating.
Page 821
2/90 Relay, Windshield Wiper, Low/High Speed
2/91 Relay, Intermittent Windshield Wiper
2/92 Relay, Windshield Washer Motor
2/93 Relay, Rear Window Washer Motor

Page 376
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 6
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 336
If the reading is not correct. Replace the cable and/or continue according to "Contact Resistance
and Oxidation". Always check the control module and control module box connectors to ensure that
their pins and sockets are not bent or damaged, this may cause faults. Check pins and terminals
particularly carefully.
Short-Circuit to Ground, Intermittent Faults
Short-circuit to ground, intermittent faults
A short-circuit between a live cable and ground is often indicated by the loss of a function or a fuse
blowing when a current is passed through the cable. Repair wiring and cable terminals as required,
using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Activate all switches and
sensors in the circuit. Check whether the fuse blows.
- Disconnect the connectors in the circuit to ensure that they do not affect readings.
Connect an ohmmeter between cable and ground. The ohmmeter should read infinite resistance if
no components are connected. Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during measurement
to locate the damage. If the value is not correct, try a new cable and/or continue according to
"Contact Resistance and Oxidation".
Short-Circuit to Supply Voltage. Intermittent Faults
Short-circuit to supply voltage, intermittent faults
A short-circuit between a cable and supply voltage is often indicated by the loss of a function or a
fuse blowing when a current is passed through the cable.

Page 1355
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Page 574

Page 1274
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
Is the car equipped with the Road Traffic Information (RTI) system?
-------------------------------------------------

Page 675
Remove:
- the screws on the front edge
- the holder from the base section using a screwdriver
- holder with the cable lead in from the base section and push to one side.
Base section
Page 69
SW = Software
DESCRIPTION:If the customer experience strange behavior from the navigation system i.e. black
screen at start up, restart, reset, arrow not moving, strange route choices, abnormal ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) etc, always start with upgrading the unit to the latest software. By doing
this we can eliminate already corrected problems from earlier software.
PRODUCT MODIFICATION:
New SW 09w14 (C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-, XC90 MY 2007-) New SW 10w20 (S80 MY2007-,
V/XC70 MY 2008-, XC60 MY 2010-)
SERVICE: Check the SW version prior to an SW upgrade. If the unit already has the latest SW the
SW upgrade will not work.
For S80 -06, S60, V70, XC70, XC90, C30, C70, S40 and V50. Use the latest software upgrade
CD-ROM P/N 31266835.
In S60, V70, XC70 and S80 - MY 2006 (CU-P2001) the SW will be upgraded to version 14.05.
In C30, S40, V50, C70 -2007 and XC90 -MY 2006 (MMM) the SW will be upgraded to version
14.04.
In XC90 MY 2007-2009, C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-2009 (MMM+) Use the latest software
upgrade CD-ROM P/N 31310029. The SW will be upgraded to version 1404/2400
For P3 cars i.e. S80 MY 2007-, V70 MY 2008-, XC70 MY 2008- and XC60 MY 2009- use the latest
software upgrade DVD-ROM. There are four different P/N depending on region. P/N 30630953 US.
The SW will be upgraded to version 8BC6.
Note:
This is a Service SW disc only. It will NOT update map data
39725-2 Software road traffic information module (RTI) upgrade. See VSTG for time allowance.
Page 933
54/50 Connector
54/51 Connector
54/53 Connector
54/54 Connector
54/55 Connector
Description and Operation
Control Unit: Description and Operation
System overview Active On-demand Coupling (AOC)
The main role of Active On-demand Coupling and the differential electronic module (DEM) is to
regulate the four-wheel drive function, i.e. the distribution of drive between the front and rear axles.
The system consists of a coupling combining mechanical, hydraulic and electronic sections. The
coupling unit is on the rear axle, between the differential gear and the propeller shaft. The
mechanical and hydraulic sections are driven by the rotation of the propeller shaft. Active
On-demand Coupling (AOC) has the following characteristics: -
Permanent all wheel drive with electronic control of torque transfer
- Driving characteristics similar to all wheel drive
- Quicker reactions
- No wind-up during slow speed maneuvers and parking
- The system is not sensitive to differences between tires (when driving with a spare wheel for
example)
- The system is not sensitive to being towed with one axle raised
- Unaffected by brake tests on a chassis dynamometer.
Coupling unit and control module

Page 963
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
1/1 Battery
2/16 Relay, Intermittent Rear Window Wiping On/Off
2/17 Horn Relay
2/22 AC Relay
2/23 Fuel Pump Relay

Page 530

Page 252
8/18 EVAP Valve
8/19 Variable Valve Timing Valve
8/28 Turbocharger Control Valve
8/30 Driver Side Airbag Igniter
8/31 Passenger Side Airbag Igniter

Page 918

Page 1113
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 954
Data Link Connector (DLC). See Connector data link connector (DLC), repair See: Connectors,
Repair/Connector Data Link Connector (DLC), Repair.
Connector for the SRS module, see Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS),
repair See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), Repair.
Page 268

Page 771

Replacing ABS / DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction
Control) Control Module
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing ABS / DSTC (Dynamic Stability and
Traction Control) Control Module
Replacing ABS / DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) control module
Preparation
Removing the battery lead

Disconnecting.
Note! There is no need to download software when replacing the ABS control module.

Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Removing the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
Brake pipe from hydraulic unit / front wheel / junction, replacing See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe From Hydraulic Unit /
Front Wheel / Junction, Replacing.
Removal
Remove:
Carefully lower the control module.
Checking the control module

Page 755
- Fold the rear seat cushions forward.
- Fold both the rear backrests forward
- Remove the seat belts from the guides (1).
- Fold the rear backrests forward.
Applies to the S60

Page 251
7/172 Position Sensor, Camshaft, Intake Side
7/173 Sensor, Camshaft
8/3 Solenoid Switch AC
8/6-10 Injectors
8/17 EGR Valve

Page 929
54/10 Connector
54/11 Connector
54/12 Connector
54/13 Connector
54/14 Connector
Page 1284
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 529

Page 1088
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation
Main Relay (System Relay)
The function of the main relay (system relay) is to supply certain components with voltage.
The relay is mechanical and has a closing function. In the rest position the circuit in the relay is
open.
The main relay terminals (#30 and #86) are supplied with voltage by the battery. When the ignition
key has been turned and the Engine Control Module (ECM) is powered, the terminal (#85) on the
main relay is grounded by the Engine Control Module (ECM).
When the terminal (#85) is grounded, the relay is activated and a number of components are
powered via the relay terminal (#87).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the main relay.
The main relay is in the relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.

Page 523
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 768
- Insert a screwdriver up between the bracket and the relay box. Turn the screwdriver so that the
bracket expands and, at the same time, pull the relay box from the bracket towards the underside
of the dashboard.
- Lift away the relay box from the bracket and pull it downward under the dashboard.
Replacing relay/shunt
Page 552
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 491
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 140
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Design
Steering Column Control Module: Description and Operation Design
Steering Wheel Buttons
The steering wheel buttons control functions and menu selection for:
- Traffic information (option).
- Audio (option).
- Carphone (option).
- Cruise control (option).
The signals from the steering wheel buttons are transmitted via serial communication.
The steering wheel buttons are connected in series to the steering wheel module (SWM) via
contact reel in the steering wheel hub. The steering wheel buttons are connected in the following
order, counted from the contact reel:
1. Cruise control. 2. Audio /carphone. 3. Traffic information.
There are diagnostics for the steering wheel buttons.

Suspension - Front Suspension Resonating Noise
Coil Spring Insulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Suspension Resonating
Noise
Retailer Technical Journal 4116 Front suspension, Resonance noise
Date 03-12-2010
Reference: VIDA, VSTG
Note!
AFFECTED VEHICLES:
DESCRIPTION:
A resonance noise (around a frequency of 340 hz) may appear from the front suspension.
MATERIALS:
SERVICE:
If the resonance noise is confirmed to be coming from the front springs, install the insulators on the
upper and lower spring seats (perform repair on both sides).
WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION

Page 713

Page 953
Connector Type 3

Locations

Page 293
16/26 Central Dashboard Speaker
16/35 Alarm Siren SCM
16/36 TV Receiver
16/46 RTI Display

Page 862
8/32 Igniter, Passenger Side Airbag Stage 2
8/33-34 FL/FR Belt Tensioner Igniter
8/33-34 FL And FR Belt Tensioner Igniter
8/36 Shift Lock Solenoid

Page 278
11D/1-7
11D/8-18
Page 715
electronic module. Use the three M6-screws, tightening them to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.).
illustrated.
- Reinstall the panels.
- Refit the insulation panel.
- Reinstall the storage box.

Page 313
54/11 Connector
54/12 Connector
54/13 Connector
54/14 Connector
54/16 Connector
Page 139
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Service and Repair
Auxiliary Cabin Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
Control module engine coolant heater, replacing
As the illustrations in this service information are used for different model years and / or models,
some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Preparations
Remove the battery lead. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
and Repair/Procedures/Battery, Disconnecting.
Remove:
- the bumper cover. See (S80), Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (V70), Casing,
bumper front, replacing See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover /
Fascia/Service and Repair (V70XC) or Casing, bumper front, replacing See: Body and
Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair (S60)
- the two upper screws (as illustrated) and the center screw on the left hand slide mounting
- the left air baffle.
Removing the control module for the engine coolant heater
Points to observe when replacing the control module:
- If moving a control module from one car to another, remember to note any diagnostic trouble code
(DTC)(s) and operating times before removing the control module from the car
- Always check that the terminals or pins in the control module connectors are not bent or
damaged. This may have been the cause of the fault.
Page 1262
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 149
Page 1428
The table summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the transmission control module
(TCM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial communication and
Controller area network (CAN) communication. The following illustration displays the same
Page 273
10/48,55 RH And LH Reversing Light
11 A-B/no. Fuses In Engine Compartment
11A/1-7

Page 1265
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windshield Washing

Page 1061
Raise the car
Remove:
- the connector from the control unit
- control module from the vehicle
- cable harness from its brackets
- cable harness from the vehicle
Check that the fuel line is located in its clamps.
Vehicles with fuel pump module located in spare wheel well's right trailing edge.
Remove:
- luggage compartment mat/floor hatches so that spare wheel well can be released
- the connector from the control unit
- the control module from Velcro fastener
Installation
Vehicles with fuel pump module originally located on fuel tank.
Connect a new cable harness to the connector by the sill and the fuel tank. Place the cable
harness in the seal ring's slot and in the bracket on the body. Install the floor hatch and tighten with
6 Nm.
Page 706
position 30.

Page 592
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 835
3/171 Switch, Retractable Door Mirrors
3/173 Switch, Trunk Lid Private Lock
3/174 Switch, Reduced Alarm
3/183 Switch, Max Defrost
4/9 Control Module, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Page 795
illustration.
problem.
Page 1103
Warning! The ignition must not be switched on when the SRS ignition cable connector is being
removed or installed.
When all components have been installed:
- switch ignition to position II
- reconnect the battery negative lead.
Note! Check that the SRS indicator lamp is not defective by turning the key to position II. The SRS
indicator lamp should light and go out after approximately seven seconds.
- Check that the SRS indicator lamp is not lit constantly. If the lamp is lit constantly use the data link
connector (DLC) or VCT2000 to trace the fault.
Page 606
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 836
4/16 Brake Control Module BCM
4/28 Transmission Control Module TCM
4/31 Fan Control Module
4/33 Sunroof Control Module SRM
4/46 Engine Control Module ECM

Page 227
4/31 Fan Control Module

Page 396
Release the relevant secondary lock by adjusting the locks with an electrician's screwdriver, as
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 436
into place.
Install:
Brakes/Service and Repair
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master
Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Function test
Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
1/1 Battery
2/16 Relay, Intermittent Rear Window Wiping On/Off
2/17 Horn Relay
2/22 AC Relay
2/23 Fuel Pump Relay

Page 648

Page 324
54/50 Connector
54/51 Connector
54/53 Connector
54/54 Connector
54/55 Connector
Page 556
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1343
- Ignition on.
This function is used to read off the diagnostic data from the control module in thebackground. If
the VIDA log function is activatedwhilethe read out is taking place, all data that is read off will be
logged. The VIDA log function allows logs to be saved or read off for example. This makes it easier
to analyze data or to include the log files in a report for example.
- VIDA log function activated (log status on).

Note! If this has not already been done, exit this procedure. Select vehicle profile and set the
logging status to On.
If the VIDA log function is already activated and has previously logged other activities which are not
required, exit this procedure and log off VIDA. The existing log can then be removed. Delete the log
and close it. Then log on to VIDA again.
Do you want to start reading off? The data read off starts automatically when YES is selected.
Yes - Reading off diagnostic data
No - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off diagnostic data
Continue - Finishing the read off
-------------------------------------------------
Page 986
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 30
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1094
When a driver and/or passenger airbag module has deployed:
- all seat belt tensioners, seat belt buckles and end mountings in the rear seat (and in the third row
rear seat where applicable) have been activated and should therefore be replaced
- the seat belt tensioners in the front seats are checked according to Seat belt tensioner, checking,
as activation of the tensioner function depends on whether seat belt was in use or not.
When the vehicle is subjected to collision forces without the driver and/or passenger airbag module
deploying:
- all the seat belt tensioners in the car must be checked.
Procedures When replacing seat belts that were in use in a collision, cut the seat belt to prevent
reuse.
Page 1000
Note! The relay holders can be connected and several locks may need to be adjusted at the same
time.
Installation
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Slide back the secondary lock.
Finishing work
Install the relays.

Reinstall the central relay box.
Connector Holder
Connector holder
Page 357
Data link connector, assembling
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), Repair
Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1339
Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information, Steering Wheel Module
Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information, steering wheel module
Contents
- Frozen values steering wheel module, description See: Scan Tool Testing and
Procedures/Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description
Note! The parameters that can be read off for the steering wheel module display how the steering
wheel module interprets the position on the buttons and control stalks. In the event of a fault in the
buttons or the wiring, the status will be constantly On or Off depending on the position on the
buttons and control stalks.
High beam flash, status
The value is displayed if the high beam flash is activated. Not activated Flash Rocker position high
beam / low beam
Read button, status
The value indicates if the read button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Reset button, status
The value indicates if the reset button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Right-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the right-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Left-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the left-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Cruise control on / off button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control on / off button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control +button, status
This value indicates whether the +button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control -button, status

Page 1461
1. Oil pressure and temperature sensor 2. Differential electronic module (DEM) 3. Control
valve/axial solenoid 4. Electrical feed pump. The differential electronic module (DEM) is secured
directly to the coupling unit and forms a single unit with the axial solenoid and control valve. The
differential electronic module (DEM) receives signals from the engine control module (ECM) and
the brake control module (BCM) via the control area network (CAN). The differential electronic
module (DEM) uses the sensor signals to control the oil pressure to the multi-plate clutch by
adjusting the axial solenoid. The axial solenoid regulates the control valve constantly using a pulse
width modulation (PWM) signal. The oil pressure for the multi-plate clutch determines the amount
of torque which can be transferred to the rear wheels.
Note: If the car has dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC), the required stability control is
applied before four wheel drive.
Active On-demand Coupling (AOC) has an oil pressure and temperature sensor, which gauge the
prevailing temperature and pressure of the hydraulic fluid. The oil pressure and temperature sensor
provide the differential electronic module (DEM) with information about the temperature and
pressure. Four wheel drive is disengaged to protect the coupling unit from damage if the
temperature becomes too high, above 97°C. The coupling unit is re-engaged at full function when
the temperature falls below 93°C.
Mechanical function, overview

Locations

Page 820
2/79 Brake Light Relay
2/80 Reversing Light Relay
2/82 Relay, Heated Rear Window
2/83 Trailer Fog Light Relay
2/87 Unlocking Relay, Tailgate

Locations
Power Distribution Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 202
Part 2 Of 2
All values given are between the relevant terminal in column 1 and terminal # A16 or # A47
(ground), unless otherwise indicated in brackets. Terminals 8-10,12-14, 24,26, 35, 38, 40-41 and
44 are not used.
Note! It is important that the breakout box is connected and that the ground terminals have been
checked before readings are taken.
Page 495
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 832
3/118 Climate Control Switch
3/119 Climate Control Switch, Auto
3/121 Climate Control Switch, Defroster
3/122 Climate Control Switch, Ventilation
3/123 Climate Control Switch, Floor

Page 869
9/2 Heated Rear Window
9/12-13 Left/Right Seat Heater
9/12-13 Left And Right Seat Heater

Page 903
16/47 GPS Antenna RTI
16/55-56 LH And RH Front Tweeter

Page 1387
- Remove the old horn. The horn will not be reused.
Installation
- Take the new horn from the kit

- Insert the new left dummy button in its socket
- Press the dummy button until the catch engages
- Install the screw. Tighten the dummy button
- Connect the connector to the dummy button.
- Take the remote control keypad (from the kit) and insert it in its socket
- Press the keypad until the catch engages
- Install the screw. Tighten the keypad
- Connect the connector to the keypad.
- Reinstall the horn. Ensure that the three springs are correctly positioned. Check that the ground
lead is not trapped
- Tighten the screws crosswise. Tighten to 6.5 Nm (5 ft.lb)
- Reinstall the ground lead. Tighten the ground lead
- Connect the connector for the horn and the keypads
- Check the function of the horn. Press the horn all the way round its circumference.
Page 1157
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking Contact Reel
Checking contact reel
Disconnect contact reel from SWM control unit. Check resistance between B1 and B2. The
resistance should be infinite. Check resistance between B1 and B3. The resistance should be
infinite. Check resistance between B2 and B3. The resistance should be infinite. Check wire B1
between contact reel 1 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals.
Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B2 between
contact reel 2 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault
See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B3 between contact reel 3
for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Do the necessary corrective action.
- For information on signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
- To connect a test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
- To access/replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing.
Page 708
- Plug in the connectors of the cargo compartment lighting and refit the sill panel.
- Reposition the folding panels and refit the cargo compartment carpet.
Applies to the V70
equipment.
Page 143

Page 1155
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 661
Check
compartment.
Ordering software

Page 712

Page 668
- Remove the holder from the lower section. See Lower section
- Disconnect the capacitor from the lower section / mounting hooks.
Lower section
Page 693
Exposing the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment

Switch off the ignition. Remove the left side panel in the cargo compartment.
Release the integrated relay/fusebox. Lift the catch by the upper edge and angle out the integrated
relay/fusebox.
HINT: The rear panel in the side panel of the cargo compartment can be removed to change fuses.
- Align the integrated relay/fusebox in the grooves in the bracket and press into place.
- Install the left side panel in the cargo compartment.
Replacing the rear electronic module
The rear electronic module is a separate unit in the relay box in the cargo compartment.
software.
Release the relay and fuse box.

Page 292
16/5-6 RH And LH Rear Door Speaker
16/10 Horn 1
16/11 Horn 2
16/16 Window Antenna Amplifier, Left

Page 1368
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 746
- Remove both the floor hatches. First lift the rear edges of the floor hatches slightly. Then pull the
- Remove the storage box under the rear floor hatch by turning the clip on the right and left-hand
side 90°. Lift out the box.
- Remove the left folding panel from the cargo compartment.

Page 345
Data Link Connector (DLC). See Connector data link connector (DLC), repair See: Connectors,
Repair/Connector Data Link Connector (DLC), Repair.
Connector for the SRS module, see Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS),
repair See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), Repair.
Page 914

Page 773
which is required to order the correct software.
This method of removal applies to both the driver door module (DDM) and the passenger door
module (PDM).
- Ignition off
- Remove the door panel
- Remove the nut and screw holding the door module
- Pry up the rear edge of the door module. Pull the door module backwards and upwards. Remove
the door module from its mounting on the door panel
- Press up the door module.
To remove the upper panel, see Removing the upper panel.
Check
This method of installation applies to both the driver door module (DDM) and the passenger door
module (PDM).
- Position the door module in the hole on the door panel.
Check that the lower mounting for the door module is correctly located in the support on the door
panel
- Press the door module into place

Page 1270
- Defective control module.
Fault symptom[s]
- Rear windshield washing does not operate.
Checking Rear Windshield Washing
Checking rear windshield washing
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer with the wiper switch. Read off the status.
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- To replace the wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer. Read off the status.
Hint: If the tailgate washer status is OK the fault is in the tailgate washer.
Was the tailgate washer status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 738
- Remove the control module, see instruction Removing the control module.
- Disconnect the catches. Lift the upper panel from the control module.
Installing the upper panel
In reverse order.
Page 573

Page 671
Relay Box: Service and Repair
Central Electrical Unit Engine Compartment
Central electrical unit, engine compartment, replacing
Removal
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery, Replacing.
Cover
Page 536
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 1163
Fault symptom[s]
- Rear windshield washing does not operate.
Checking Rear Windshield Washing
Checking rear windshield washing
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer with the wiper switch. Read off the status.
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- To replace the wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the tailgate washer. Read off the status.
Hint: If the tailgate washer status is OK the fault is in the tailgate washer.
Was the tailgate washer status OK?
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 966
Data link connector, assembling
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), Repair
Connector Supplemental Restraint System Module (SRS), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 647

Page 619
2/29 Relay, Extended D1 Feed

Page 18
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation Design
Design
1. Radio antenna. Integrated in the rear windshield on the S60/S80, in the left-hand side window on
the V70/V70XC 2. Antenna amplifier FM/AM, located in the D-post 3. Loudspeakers, positioned in
the parcel shelf (D-post V70/V70XC) 4. Keypad in the steering wheel for audio and telephone 5.
Center loudspeaker with display for cars with the Road Traffic Information module (RTI) 6. Center
loudspeaker for cars without a Road Traffic Information Module (RTI) 7. Audio module (AUM) -
Sound unit audio 8. Door-mounted loudspeakers front (treble) 9. Door-mounted loudspeakers front
(bass/mid-range) 10. External amplifier, positioned under the right-hand front seat 11. Rear
door-mounted loudspeakers 12. Antenna amplifier for the bumper antenna 13. FM antenna
integrated in the bumper 14. CD changer audio.
Antenna
The audio module (AUM) has an antenna system for AM and FM. This consists partly of an AM
antenna and partly of a dual antenna system for FM (Diversity reception). The dual antenna system
is used to reduce Multipath interference. One antenna is integrated in the rear windshield (left-hand
rear side window V70/V70XC). The other antenna is integrated in the rear bumper. The signals
from the antennae are amplified or adjusted by each individual antenna amplifier.
External amplifier
Locations
4/68 Steering Angle Sensor Module SAS

Page 170
- for first generation seats, see Lifting seats in and out See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. For second generation seats, see Removing power seats,
tilting See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Ordering software
Finishing
Control Module Heater Pad, Replacing
Control module heater pad, replacing
Removing the heater pad control module
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Remove one screw. Disconnect the
connector. Remove the control module.
Installing the heater pad control module
Install:
- the connector
- one screw
- the seat. See Removing power seats, tilting See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Page 1271
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition

Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking SWM Control Unit

Specifications
Engine Control Module: Specifications
Component specifications
The component specification gives the value of the component when the connector is
disconnected. Where no value is given, it is not possible to measure a relevant value at the
component. The figure within the brackets indicates the terminal pin on the component to which the
value refers.
Page 1174
- Ignition off.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 240
7/8 AC Pressure Sensor
7/10 Interior Temperature Sensor
7/11 Outside Temperature Sensor
7/12 Sun Sensor, Indication Alarm And Electronic Immobilizer
7/15 Heated Oxygen Sensor

Page 959
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Release the secondary lock. Use electrician's screwdriver as illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 878
10/64 RH High Beam
10/66 RH Low Beam
10/68 LH High Beam

Page 992
Page 27

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Page 988
Page 137
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 354
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Page 360
Fold up the secondary lock (1), as illustrated. Use an electrician's screwdriver.
Primary lock
Page 830
3/91 Switch, LH Heated Seat
3/92 Switch, RH Heated Seat

Design, Control Module
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Design, Control Module
Design, Control Module
The task of the supplemental restraint system module (SRS) is to reduce driver and passenger
injuries in the event of different types of accidents. This is carried out by the control module
validating incoming collision pulse signals, that is the acceleration signals, triggered by a collision,
and to select an action.
The control module has an internal sensor as assistance, as well as the external crash sensor. The
system selects one of the following to activate based on the collected data:
- front airbags.
- the side impact protection (SIPS) bags.
- the inflatable curtains.
- the seat belt tensioner.
The crash sensor in the supplemental restraint system module (SRS) registers the longitudinal
mechanical stresses which occur in the event of a frontal collision. A side impact can also be
registered by the crash sensor. The longitudinal stresses are measured using two acceleration
sensors. When the longitudinal stresses exceed a certain level a calculation of the stress (the
collision pulse) starts.
This evaluates if the impact was great enough to activate the airbags and/or the seat belt
tensioners. The seat belt tensioners can be activated without the air bags being activated, or vice
versa.
Airbags and seat belt tensioners can be activated individually. Driver and passenger airbags and
seat belt tensioners are designed to deploy in the event of a frontal collision.
When the collision protection system is activated, the control module transmits a current pulse to
the ignition mechanisms in the airbags and/or the seat belt tensioners. No seat belt tensioners or
airbags will be activated in the event of a collision from the rear.
Two requirements need to be fulfilled in order for the side impact protection system to be activated.
One; that the collision pulse is so high that a trigger signal is sent from the side impact sensor to
the control module. Two; the control module or another collision sensor transmits a confirmation
signal which makes it possible for the collision protection system to deploy. When the control
module has received a trigger signal and a confirmation signal, the side impact protection system
can deploy.
If the side impact occurred at the front of the vehicle the side airbags and the inflatable curtain are
deployed on the side that received the impact. If the side impact occurred at the rear of the vehicle
only the inflatable curtain is deployed.
The control module has a collision recording function. This records certain system information in
the event of a collision. The information can be analyzed and used after a collision if required.
This information is used to develop the collision safety systems of the future.
In the event of a collision the supplemental restraint system module (SRS) transmits a collision
signal to the phone module (PHM) and the central electronic module (CEM) via a directly
connected cable.
The purpose of the signal is to switch off the fuel pump, to light the interior lighting, to unlock the
doors, and if the car is equipped with Volvo On Call (Plus), to transmit an automatic alarm to the
Customer Service Center when the vehicle is involved in an accident. This also applies in the event
of a collision from the rear.
A collision signal is also sent to the phone module (PHM) and the rear electronic module (REM) via
the controller area network (CAN).
The control module decides to deploy either the airbags or the seat belt tensioner. This is based
on:
- Whether the driver and passenger front seat belts are being used or not.
- If there are faults in the side impact sensor or the terminals for.
- the side impact sensor.
- If there are faults in the seat belt buckle.

Page 1443
Note! Do not touch the control module terminal pins with your fingers. Static electricity may damage
components in the control module.
Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench (1) in the car around the
control module. Move the upper section of the tool backwards as far as it will go (2). Pull up the
tool. Carefully pull up the control module.

Page 747
- Remove the left side panel by first removing the cover and the screw from the front edge.
- Fold the panel inwards. Lift the panel out.
- Remove the 4 x screws in the tailgate sill panel.

Page 590
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1156
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - steering wheel module

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 264
10/5-6 FL/FR Fog Light

Page 969
Fold up the secondary lock (1), as illustrated. Use an electrician's screwdriver.
Primary lock
Page 946
- Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Use a voltmeter to take
readings at various points in the circuit while operating switches and sensors.
The voltmeter reading depends on the circuit being tested and the positions of switches and
sensors. Use the wiring diagram to determine the correct voltage in the circuit. Use an ohmmeter
between the suspect cables to detect short-circuits between them. The ohmmeter should read
infinite resistance between cables not connected to each other in the circuit. Shake the cable lightly
and pull on connectors during measurement to locate the damage. If the reading is not correct.
Replace the cable and/or continue according to "Loose Connections (Terminals)".
Loose Connections (Terminals)
Loose connections (terminals)
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures.
Loose connections in terminals may be caused by oxidation of the pins and sockets, or by a faulty
connection of a cable to its cable terminal. Loose connections produce the same faults as an
intermittent open-circuit in a cable.
Checks:
- Inspect terminals visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Continue according to

In theory, the resistance across contacts, leads and terminals should be 0 [ohm]. However, there is
always some resistance due to terminal oxidation. If resistance is too great there will be function
problems. The magnitude of the resistance before it causes a malfunction depends on the circuit
load. A guideline would be a few ohms.
Page 666
- Remove the battery leads from the holder
- Remove the screws from the holder.

Page 1291
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 372
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 5
Connector door, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 309

Page 267
10/29 Glove Compartment Lighting
10/44-45, 10/51-52 RH/LH Tail Light Lamp 1/2
10/44-45, 10/51-52 RH Tail Light Lamp 1/2, LH Tail Light Lamp 1/2

Page 845
6/62 LH Power Door Mirror
6/63 RH Power Door Mirror
6/64 Passenger Seat Motor, Backrest Angle
6/65 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/down Front Edge
6/66 Passenger Seat Motor, Up/down Rear Edge

Page 761
Remove:
- the screw (1) from the right-hand side of the tailgate sill trim panel
- the three screws (2) in the right-hand floor support
- the floor support.
- Route the new cable harness along the side of the cargo compartment and out into the passenger
- Route the cable harness from the left-hand cable duct under the seat cushion, along the wheel
arch and out through the hole in the car body behind the backrest. Then route along the wheel arch
and rear crossmember over to the right-hand side of the car
- Continue to route the cable harness along the right-hand side of the cable duct and forward into
the car. Then route the cable out through the hole in the car body behind the lower edge of the
backrest. Continue to the existing ground terminals under the seat cushion
(from the kit)
Applies to the V70

Page 1169
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1151
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 162
Power Seat Control Module: Locations Power Driver's Seat Module PSM

Page 1373
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Locations

Page 1115

Page 438
Check:
STC or not)
hydraulic modulator
Installation
Install the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 308

Page 1059
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Control module fuel pump (FP), replacing
Note! Some variation may occur. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always
correct.
Removal
Vehicles with fuel pump module located on fuel tank
Open Luggage Compartment Lid/tailgate
Remove:
- luggage compartment mat/floor hatches and side panels on the right side
- backseat's seat cushion
Fold the rear seat backrest forward. Remove the right side upholstery Refer to: Upholstery, side
cushion, replacing See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Seat,
Passenger Seat/Upholstery, Side Cushion, Replacing Remove the right part of the backrest Use
new bolt, 1 pc. M10. Tighten with 50 Nm.
Page 667
- Lift up / detach the holder and seals for the cable harnesses
- Release the connectors.
Main fuse
- Release the holder. See Retainer.
Note! The connectors do not need to be disconnected.
- Remove the nuts for the fuse
- Remove the fuse.
Main fuse location, 11A
1. See the wiring diagram for the relevant model year 2. Decals at respective integrated
relay/fusebox in the car, 3. Pocket data book, 4. Owner's Manual.
Capacitor
Page 1029
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
System Overview
Control module
The Engine Control Module (ECM) controls the following functions:
- injectors
- ignition
- camshafts (CVVT)
- evaporative emission system (EVAP) valve
- turbocharger (TC) control
- throttle angle
- engine cooling fan (FC)
- Air conditioning (A/C) compressor
- fuel pump (only vehicles with demand controlled fuel pumps).
There is a micro-processor in the control module which receives signals from the different sensors
in the car. The micro-processor uses a program which interprets the signals from the different
sensors and how the components/functions should be controlled.
The control module has several self-learning (adaptive) functions. It continually adapts ongoing
calculations to changing circumstances (wear, air leaks, differences between different fuels etc.).
Emissions are kept low through efficient management of the injection period, ignition, evaporative
emission system (EVAP) valve and camshafts etc. Faults which affect emissions can be detected
by running diagnostics for functions and components.
The control module is in a box in the engine compartment.

The engine control module (ECM) communicates with other control modules using controller area
network (CAN) communication.
The engine control module (ECM) checks activations, input and output signals and functions using
an integrated diagnostic system. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if, after validation, the
control module detects a fault. In certain cases the faulty signal is replaced with a substitute value
or certain functions are limited.
Substitute values can be set for e.g:
- engine coolant temperature (ECT)
- mass air flow
- throttle position
- atmospheric pressure
- etc.
Mathematical calculations and signals from certain components are used to calculate the substitute
values. Other substitute values are fixed, predefined values in the control module.
The substitute value allows the car to be driven and for the emissions to be kept at a reasonable
level even though vital functions/components are faults.
Functions which are limited may be for example:
- turbocharger (TC) control
- Camshaft control (CVVT)

Page 1429
Control Module: Description and Operation Design
Design Control module
The transmission control module (TCM) is positioned in an air cooled plastic box in the engine
compartment together with the engine control module (ECM).
Shift solenoids S1, S2, S3, S4 and S5
The shift solenoids S1, S2, S3, S4 and S5 are positioned in the valve body in the transmission
control system, which is mounted on the front edge of the transmission. The shift solenoids (on/off
type), consist of an electrical coil which controls a hydraulic valve. The solenoids are supplied with
12 V via the transmission control module (TCM) and grounded in the control system. The shift
solenoids control shifting and the transmission control module (TCM) determines which gear is to
be used by activating them in different patterns. There is a diagnostic for the shift solenoids.
Lock-up solenoid, SLU
The lock-up solenoid, SLU is in the transmission control system, which is mounted on the front
edge of the transmission. The lock-up solenoid consists of an electrical coil which controls a
hydraulic valve. The solenoid is controlled by pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage and is
grounded via the transmission control module (TCM). The solenoid controls lock-up engagement of
the torque converter. Engagement occurs through solenoid pulsing which provides a soft lock-up
engagement function. The solenoid allows the torque converter to work in one of three modes: -
Open
- Controlled slipping
- Locked.
The hydraulic function of the solenoid is linear. There is a diagnostic for the lock-up solenoid.
Page 934
54/56 Connector
54/65 Connector
54/79 Connector
54/106 Connector
How to Use the Wiring Diagrams

Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Relay
The air conditioning (A/C) relay supplies the A/C compressor with voltage. The relay is controlled
by the engine control module (ECM) based on information from different signals:
- the climate control module (CCM) (via the control area network (CAN))
- the engine coolant temperature
- the position of the accelerator pedal (AP)
- the pressure in the system.
The Engine Control Module (ECM) can temporarily disengage the A/C compressor during wide
open throttle (WOT) acceleration.
The relay is mechanical. It has a closing/breaking function and is supplied with power from the
system relay.
In the rest position the circuit in the relay is open.
The system relay supplies the coil and the relay with power. The relay activates when the coil is
grounded in the engine control module (ECM), the circuit closes and the A/C compressor is
supplied with power via the relay voltage output.
The relay coil is grounded (signal) when the engine control module (ECM) receives a signal via the
Controller area network (CAN) from the climate control module (CCM) to activate the relay and
start the compressor.
Page 1032
Page 1418
Page 1422

Page 978
Primary lock
Page 1221
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 882
10/48,55 RH And LH Reversing Light
11 A-B/no. Fuses In Engine Compartment
11A/1-7

Page 415
- Remove the screws.
Use a 6 mm torx external socket
- Carefully pull the control module down so that the terminal pin on the control module comes loose
inside the ABS modulator
- Continue pulling the control module down towards the brake lines and lift it out.
Checking the new control module
Check:
- the control module is correct (compare to the old one)
- that none of the pins on the connector are damaged
hydraulic modulator
- that no parts of the old control module seals remain on the old ABS hydraulic modulator valves.
Installation
Position the control module on the brake lines. Center the control module with the ABS modulator
valves so that the terminal pins are correctly positioned in the modulator.
Page 274
11B/1-10
Page 569
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 911

Page 317
54/51 Connector
54/53 Connector
54/54 Connector
54/55 Connector
54/56 Connector
Page 681
- Disconnect the air cleaner (ACL) housing.
- Remove the nut for the battery leads. Disconnect the battery leads
- Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the electrical box.
Comfort Panel (Including Climate Control Module, CCM),
Replacing
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Comfort Panel (Including Climate Control Module,
CCM), Replacing
Comfort panel (including climate control module, CCM), replacing
Preparations
Note! Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. This is carried out
via VIDA vehicle communication. After replacing the control module, the relevant parameters must
be programmed into the new control module.
Replacing dashboard environment panel
Ignition off. Remove the key.
Note! After the key has been removed: Wait 3 minutes before starting work.
V70
V70 has a pen holder above the gear selector panel. Remove it. See Pen holder See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Pen Holder. Remove the panel (1) above the
gear selector: Carefully pry off at the back using a weatherstrip tool.
S80
Remove the panel (1) above the gear selector: Carefully pry off at the back using a weatherstrip
tool.
Note! The gear selector must be in the rearmost position before the comfort panel can be removed.
Page 288
Fuses 11E/1-7
11D/No. Fuses In Cargo Compartment Fuse Box
11E Main Fuses At Battery

Page 1242
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
short-circuit to ground and short-circuit to
Page 265
10/13-14 FL And FR Direction Indicator
10/15-16 FL And FR Fender Direction Indicator

Page 1148
- Ignition on.
trouble code (DTC).
For further information, see Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information,
steering wheel module See: Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information,
Steering Wheel Module.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Page 397
Tool
Page 1060
Remove bracket for child seat from the floor. Use new bolt and nut. 1 pc. M10, tighten with 50 Nm.
1 pc. M12, tighten with 80 Nm.
Move aside the insulating mat.
Remove:
- right floor hatch over fuel tank
- the cable harness
Disconnect:
- cable harness' connectors by wheel housing/sill and fuel pump
- cable from brackets
Cut off the cable harness as shown. This is done to make it easier to remove the cable harness.
Remove the remaining part of the cable harness with connector.
Page 228
4/50 Electronic Throttle Module ETM
4/56 Central Electronic Module CEM
4/58 Rear Electronic Module REM

Page 429
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
Control Module for the Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
System Overview
Control module
1. Control module for the steering wheel angle sensor 2. Steering wheel angle sensor 3. Reference
groove 4. Encoder for steering movements.
Only cars equipped with DSTC (dynamic stability and traction control) have a steering wheel angle
sensor control module. The easiest way to determine if a car is equipped with DSTC (Dynamic
stability and traction control) is to search for a switch, marked DSTC, positioned in the panel on the
climate control module.
The Steering wheel Angle Sensor Module is positioned on the side of the central electronic module.
The only function of the steering wheel angle sensor is to process the signals from the steering
wheel angle sensor. The signals used by the DSTC system. The steering wheel angle sensor is
mounted on the steering wheel module and is directly connected to the steering angle sensor via a
connector on the steering wheel module. The Steering wheel angle sensor control module
transmits signal information via the high-speed side of the Controller area network (CAN) to the
brake control module, model year 2002- or the ABS control module, model year 1999-2001.
If a fault occurs the control module for the steering angle sensor detects this and a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) is stored at the same time as the DSTC function is switched off.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor.
This information can be read off using the diagnostic tool via the data link connector (DLC) in the
car.
Signals for the control module for the steering wheel angle sensor
Page 1254
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Testing and Inspection
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off extended fault-tracing information, steering wheel module

Page 1112
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 211
2/79 Brake Light Relay
2/80 Reversing Light Relay
2/82 Relay, Heated Rear Window
2/83 Trailer Fog Light Relay
2/87 Unlocking Relay, Tailgate

Page 314
54/20 Connector
54/21 Connector
54/24 Connector
54/25 Connector
54/32 Connector
Page 1025
Page 124
Other Relays
Page 38
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 896
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18

Page 1201
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 1159
Checking the windshield washing
Checking components
Hint: If the read-out of the status of the wiper switch gave a correct result, the problem is not in the
Steering wheel module (SWM).
Was the status of the wiper switch OK?
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the windshield wiper switch status is OK, the fault is in the windshield wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
Page 1363
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - digital display
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model

(-04) / V40
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
VCT2000 the
Page 526
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 1385
- Turn the steering wheel 90° so that is in the position illustrated and so that the two holes on the
reverse of the steering wheel are accessible.
- Insert a screwdriver in the hole on the reverse of the steering wheel, at right angles to the rear
surface of the steering wheel
- Insert a screwdriver as far as possible to determine the position of the end of the spring clip (1)
- Position the end of the screwdriver on top of the spring clip
- Pry the screwdriver upwards towards the upper edge of the hole (2) until the spring releases and
one side of the steering wheel module springs out and releases from the mounting
- Turn the steering wheel 180°. Carry out the procedure on the other side
- Turn the steering wheel to the neutral position.
- Fold the steering wheel module out
- Remove the two connectors (1) for the sender wiring on the airbag.
Note! The connectors are tightly secured. Do not use tools to disconnect the connectors.
- Place the steering wheel module to one side.
Remove:
- the screw (1). Remove the ground lead

Page 644
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 641
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1238
2. V70 (00-), V70 XC (01-) / XC70, S60, S80 and XC90. 3. V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70. 4.
S40 (-04)/ V40.
1 - car model S40 (04-) / V50
3 - Car model V70 (-00), V70 XC and S70 / C70
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1334
- Ignition off
- the control module disconnected.

For the control module, connect an ohmmeter between terminal #16 on the breakout box and the
battery negative terminal.
Page 167
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair Front Seat, Driver's Seat, Front Seat

Remove the key.
Install:
- the connector
- the key
Page 1241

(DIM).
references above.

Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1449
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Sensor Module Dstc

Page 915
31/1-98 Ground Connection

Page 497

Page 1364
indicator diode is activated with a red light!
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------

Page 669
- Remove the cover from the fusebox.
- Remove the holder. See Retainer
- Disconnect the air cleaner (ACL) housing
- Cut off the triple clamps for the battery leads.

Page 300
20/27 Shunt, Low Beam CEM
20/28 Shunt, Parking Light REM
20/29 Shunt, Fog Light REM
20/31 Shunt, Brake Light REM
20/32 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Left

Page 865
8/59-60 RL/RR Head Restraint Solenoid
8/59-60 RL And RR Head Restraint Solenoid
8/61 Driver Side Airbag Igniter Step 2

Page 364
Primary lock
Tool
Page 52
Communications Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Connecting the Breakout Box
Connecting the breakout box, Audio control module
Special tools:
951 1507 Adapter 12-12-8-4-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1507 Adapter 12-12-8-4-2 Pin
951 1428 Breakout box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box 951 1509 Adapter
13-8-6-8-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1509 Adapter 13-8-6-8-2 Pin
- Ignition off
- Expose the head unit / audio module. See Radio cassette player, replacing See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Radio/Cassette Player, Replacing.
Check that the male and female terminals on the unit connectors are undamaged and secure
(cannot be pressed in). Check that the cables to the female terminals are secured to the terminal
pins.
Note! In order for the below connections to be made take note of the color codes of the connectors.
Connect adapter951 1507 Adapter 12-12-8-4-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1507 Adapter
12-12-8-4-2 Pin to the audio control module (wiring side). Connect breakout box951 1428 Breakout
box See: Tools and Equipment/951 1428 Breakout Box to the adapter. Audio control
moduleterminals: #A1-#A12 correspond to terminals #15-#26 on the breakout box (green
connector). #B1-#B12 correspond to terminals #1-#12 on the breakout box (gray connector).
Terminals #E1-#E8 correspond to terminals #16-#23 on the breakout box. When connecting
connector D, adapter951 1509 Adapter 13-8-6-8-2 Pin See: Tools and Equipment/951 1509
Adapter 13-8-6-8-2 Pin must be used. Terminals #D1-#D6 correspond to terminals #42-#47 on the
breakout box. The breakout box is designed to facilitate reading off the control module input and
output signals when the control module is connected; and the cable and component resistance
when the control module is disconnected. The use of a breakout box reduces the risk of accidental
short-circuited cables and damage to the connector pins. For further information about signals and
other values, see Signal specification, audio control module See: Signal Specification.
Signal Specification
Signal specification, audio control module
Connecting the breakout box and checking the ground terminal
Caution! Before starting to measure, the breakout box must be connected and the ground
connections must be checked. See Checking the ground terminals See: Component Tests and
Definitions
The audio control module, green connector

Signal Specification, Brake Control Module (BCM) With
DSTC
Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications Signal Specification, Brake Control Module (BCM)
With DSTC
Signal specification, Brake Control Module (BCM) with DSTC (dynamic stability and traction
control)
Part 1 Of 2
Locations
Head Restraint Relay: Locations

Page 1277
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1204
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1464
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased once all the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
have been read off at least once.
output signals. For further information about parameters, see Description of parameters
Reading off the control module identification
VADIS identifies control modules by reading off a number of codes from the control module
memory. The codes contain information about the control module: -
hardware P/N (control module without software)
- hardware serial number (control module without software)
- software P/N
New software for the differential electronic module (DEM) can be downloaded. When ordering
software, the hardware and the software in the car are compared to the data in the Volvo central
database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded to the control module. If the
comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK, the database is updated with
the car configuration. When this is complete the software is downloaded. The control module is
integrated in the coupling unit for the Active On-demand Coupling (AOC). If the control module is
replaced, the control valve/axial solenoid and oil pressure and temperature sensor must also be
replaced.
Page 762
- Route the cable harness along the sides of the cargo compartment and out into the passenger
- Route the cable harness from the left-hand cable duct under the seat cushion over the wheel arch
and continue to the rear edge of the left-hand floor support
- Pull up the tailgate sill trim panel on the left-hand side. Insert the cable harness between the floor
support and the sill trim panel (Illustration B)
- Slide the cable harness in towards the rear crossmember as far as possible. Ensure that the
cable harness does not get trapped (Illustration B)
- Then route the cable harness along the existing cable harness by the rear crossmember and over
to the right-hand side of the car
- Insert the cable harness towards the rear crossmember (over the right-hand side member) as far
as possible
- Route the cable harness along the right-hand side of the cable duct and forward to the existing
ground terminals under the seat cushion
(from the kit)
- Connect the black ground lead (1) to the front ground terminal (2). Use the existing ground
terminal. Tighten to approximately 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.)
- Clamp any excess cable. Use a tie strap from the kit
- Fold the insulation panel back into place.

Page 851
7/25 Impulse Sensor
7/31-32 LH/RH Front ABS Sensor
7/31-32 LH And RH Front ABS Sensor
7/41 Temperature Sensor, Evaporator

Page 1279
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Audio/Telephone Switch Unit
Checking the audio/telephone switch unit
- Ignition on.
result the fault is not in the SWM unit.
Page 35
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
the test, first replace the cable harness then the VCT2000, if the test still indicates a
Page 952
Connectors, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Sealed
Page 859
7/153 Sensor, Fuel Level LPG
7/156 Pressure And Temperature Sensor ONG
7/159 Air Quality Sensor
7/162 Pressure Sensor, Fuel Line

Page 955
Connector Control module for anti-lock brakes (ABS). See Connector control module for Anti-lock
Brake System Module (ABS), repair See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Control Module for
Anti-lock Brake System Module (ABS), Repair.
Page 705

Page 1356
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
Page 1324
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windshield Wiper Switch
Checking components
Page 42
Communications Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Checking Ground Terminal
Checking the ground terminals
Connect the breakout box. See Connecting the breakout box, Audio control module See: Pinout
Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box.
Continue - Checking the ground terminal
-------------------------------------------------

Page 219
3/74-77 LH/RH/Front And Rear Door Lock Unit
3/78 Trunk Lid Lock Unit

Page 1045
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1085

Page 852
7/51 Accelerator Pedal Sensor
7/56-57 LH And RH Rear ABS Sensor
7/61 Input Speed Sensor

Page 1307
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Page 662
Relay Box: Service and Repair Integrated Relay/Fusebox, Engine Compartment, Replacing
Integrated relay / fusebox in engine compartment
Exposing
- Disconnect the air cleaner (ACL) housing.
- Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the electrical box.
Page 296
16/62 Hand Unit, Mobile Phone
16/64 Antenna, Mobile Telephone
16/65 Antenna Ring/ignition Switch Lighting
16/67 Amplifier Antenna, Bumper
16/68 Antenna, Bumper

Page 1426
Page 1188
- Ignition off
switch
- Ignition on.
control switch.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1417
Page 645
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1101
- Remove the 3 control module screws (torx 30).
- Lift the control module.
Installation
Caution! Take care that nothing comes between the control module and the bodywork. This can
cause over-sensitivity or poor SRS system function.
Supplemental restraint system module (SRS)

Page 677
Integrated Relay/Fuse Box Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module, Replacing
correct.
Page 870
9/16-17 LH And RH Backrest Heating Element
9/18-19 LH And RH Seat Heating Element

Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Control Module: Service and Repair
Replacing the driver information control unit
Preparation
Note! Before replacing the control module all the program data should be read from the control unit.
This is done in VIDA vehicle communication. After replacement the program data should be written
to the new control module.
Removal of driver information control unit
Remove:
- the dashboard cover panel.

Page 541

Page 687
- Remove the holder from the lower section. See Lower section
- Disconnect the capacitor from the lower section / mounting hooks.
Lower section
Page 144
Other Relays
Page 1018
Disconnect the battery negative cable. See: Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and
Removal
Page 858
7/136 Glass Breakage Sensor, RH
7/137 Glass Breakage Sensor, Tailgate
7/139 Brake Pressure Sensor 1
7/143 Fuel Level Sensor, Pump Side
7/149 Rain Sensor

Page 664
Relay location
Page 907
16/78 Speaker, Mobile Telephone
16/79 Bass Speaker V70
16/50,54 LH And RH Rear Window Antenna
17/13 Data Link Connector
17/17 Jump Start Connection

Page 478

Page 778
Location of fuse 11D

Page 814

Page 380
Primary lock
The secondary lock
Connector Type 7
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
illustrated.
Page 142

Page 1235
Measurement range: 0-28.4 V Normal value when the generator (GEN) is charging: 13.0-14.5 V
The value indicates the voltage at the steering wheel module.
Distance, value
Measurement range: 0-1048575 km The value indicates the total mileage of the car at the time the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Measurement range: -60 to +195 °C The value indicates the passenger compartment temperature
at the time the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Measurement range: -128 to +127.75 °C The value indicates the outside temperature at the time
the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Engine running, status
The status displays whether the engine was running when the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was
stored. Yes = the engine was running No = the engine was not running
Time, value
The value displays the time that has passed since the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) was stored.
Reading Off Detailed Diagnostic Data
Reading off detailed diagnostic data
General information about reading off

Service and Repair
Suspension Control Module: Service and Repair
Suspension module (SUM), replacing
Removal
Preparatory work
Ignition off. Move the left-hand front seat to its rearmost position.
Remove the left-hand panel from the center console (turn the clip A■1⁄4 turn). See the illustration.
Fold the floor carpet out of the way.
Removing the suspension module (SUM)

Page 1351
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading off diagnostic data

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1173
No - Vehicle equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Vehicle equipment
Is the vehicle equipped with RTI?
Yes - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 337
- Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Use a voltmeter to take
readings at various points in the circuit while operating switches and sensors.
The voltmeter reading depends on the circuit being tested and the positions of switches and
sensors. Use the wiring diagram to determine the correct voltage in the circuit. Use an ohmmeter
between the suspect cables to detect short-circuits between them. The ohmmeter should read
infinite resistance between cables not connected to each other in the circuit. Shake the cable lightly
and pull on connectors during measurement to locate the damage. If the reading is not correct.
Replace the cable and/or continue according to "Loose Connections (Terminals)".
Loose Connections (Terminals)
Loose connections (terminals)
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures.
Loose connections in terminals may be caused by oxidation of the pins and sockets, or by a faulty
connection of a cable to its cable terminal. Loose connections produce the same faults as an
intermittent open-circuit in a cable.
Checks:
- Inspect terminals visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Continue according to

In theory, the resistance across contacts, leads and terminals should be 0 [ohm]. However, there is
always some resistance due to terminal oxidation. If resistance is too great there will be function
problems. The magnitude of the resistance before it causes a malfunction depends on the circuit
load. A guideline would be a few ohms.
Page 1419
TJ Instruction No 16761
Page 395
Expose the relevant relay box. Remove the relevant relays, noting their position.
Dismantling
Secondary lock
Page 136
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 234
6/33 Fuel Pump
6/37 Lock Motor, Fuel Filler Flap
6/38-39 LH/RH Headlight Level Adjustment Motor
6/38-39 LH And RH Headlight Level Adjustment Motor

Page 1458
The table summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the differential electronic module
(DEM). The following illustration displays the same information with the Volvo component
designations.
Design Control module

Page 539
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 492
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1303
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the read button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the read button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Was the status of the read button correct?
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the read button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.

Page 239
6/105 Fuel Distributor, Gas
6/120 Engine Throttle Body
7/4 Brake Fluid Level Sensor
7/5 Washer Fluid Level Sensor
7/6 Oil Pressure Sensor

Page 824
2/158 Locking Relay, Rear Doors, Filler Flap
3/1 Ignition Switch
3/4 Cruise Control Switch SWS
3/6 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
3/8 Heated Rear Window/door Mirror Switch

Page 704
- Unscrew the front clip.
- Turn the knob (1) on the right/left side 90°.
- Fold the panels inwards. Lift the panels out
- Remove the two covers (2) and the screws (3) underneath (applies to S80 only).
- First pull the boot lid sill panel (4) forward until the two clips on the right/left side release. Pull hard
but carefully as the panel is securely fastened. Then pull the panel straight up until the four clips in
the bottom edge release.
- Remove the wiring (5) for the cargo compartment lighting.
- Lift out the sill trim panel.
- Take the wiring harness (1) from the kit. Position it along the boot lid sill with the black connector
to the right, in the rear edge on the right wheel housing.
- Take five cable ties (3) from the kit and secure the wiring harness to the existing wiring harness
as illustrated.
Page 310

Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 595
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Engine Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Erasing diagnostic trouble codes
trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased once all the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
read off at least once. When erasing diagnostic trouble codes, the diagnostic trouble code's
counter, status identifier as well as frozen values are also erased. For certain systems, stored
adaptations may also be reset when erasing.
Page 1371
Reading Off Parameters, Digital Display
Parameter, digital display
Hint: Engine must be running for certain values to be updated.
Activate parameter read-out by clicking on the symbol for VCT 2000. For information on the various
parameters see Description of parameters See: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/Description of
Parameters.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Recall 04V051000: Rear Brake Lamp Relay Malfunction
Brake Lamp Relay: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V051000: Rear Brake Lamp Relay
Malfunction
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles, the rear left and right brake light relays may not function
when the brake pedal is depressed or may stay on continuously. If the brake lights fail to come on,
there will be no lower brake lights to indicate to following vehicles that the vehicle is decelerating,
which could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the brake light relay with two relays of a modified design. The
manufacturer has reported that owner notification began on Feb. 23, 2004 . Owners may contact
Volvo at 1-800-458-1552.
Page 347
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM). See Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), repair See:
Connectors, Repair/Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), Repair.
Page 622
Power Protection Relay: Locations
Relay, 151 Feed, Rear
2/52 Relay, 151 Feed, Rear

Page 1312
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1123

Page 1258
Diagnostic outlet

above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 974
Primary locking
Secondary locking

Connector Type 3
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Page 1116
Other Relays
Page 1314
Checking the steering wheel buttons for RTI (road traffic information)
Checking the connector
- Ignition off.
Cars manufactured between 199943 - 200143 may have defective or bent terminal pins in the
connector which connect the wiring from the RTI (road traffic information) switch to the buttons on
the right-hand side of the steering wheel. As a result the ENTER and DOWN steering wheel
buttons for the road traffic information module (RTI) do not work. Check the connection to the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel for bent or defective terminal pins. Replace the keypad if a
fault is found. Remedy as necessary
Other
- To access or replace the keypad unit on the steering wheel module (SWM), see Keypad unit,
steering wheel, replacing See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Sensors and Switches -
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Steering Mounted Controls Assembly/Service and
Repair/Keypad Unit, Steering Wheel, Replacing.
Page 408
Note! In 2003 the cable terminal with a pre-crimped cable section was introduced to the Volvo
range. See the illustration. This method applies for repairs with this type of cable terminal.
Caution! Ensure that the new pin has the same type of surface treatment as the old.
Caution! For repairing SRS wiring, see: Cable harness SRS system, repair See: Restraint
Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Air Bag Harness/Service and Repair/Procedures.
Preparatory work
Page 353
Tool and951 2631 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2631 Terminal Removal
Page 873

Page 629
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 737
Check
This method of installation applies to both the driver door module (DDM) and the passenger door
module (PDM).
- Position the door module in the hole on the door panel.
Check that the lower mounting for the door module is correctly located in the support on the door
panel
- Press the door module into place
- Connect the connectors
- Install the nut and screw
- Install the door panel.
Ordering software
Order software for the driver door module (DDM) according to the table below.
Finishing
Initialise the window position in the communication input
Removing the upper panel

Page 895
11C/No. Fuses In Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
11D Fuses In Cargo Compartment Fuse Box
11D/no. Fuses In Cargo Compartment

Page 224
3/124-125 Temperature Switch, LH/RH Side
3/126 Control Module FL Door DDM/PDM

Page 931
54/32 Connector
54/34 Connector
54/35 Connector
54/37 Connector
54/39 Connector
Page 971
correct.
Secondary lock
Pin housing
Release the front housing section on the pin housing by pulling out the rear catches while at the
same time pressing the housing section forwards.
Page 386
the cable.
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool.
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 535
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1344
Finishing the read off
The read off is now complete. Exit this procedure. Log off VIDA. The completed log can now be
printed or saved. Save the log to a disc or save it locally. To save it locally, name the
filevehcom.logunderC:\volvo\logs.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading off diagnostic data
2 - Checking communication
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication
Selecting car model
1. S40 (04-) / V50.

Page 258
8/71-74 Throttle Solenoid, Shift Solenoid 3, 4 And 5

Page 1009
Note! Cable should always be connected colour for colour, single colour to single colour or multiple
colors to multiple colors. The cables must NOT under any circumstances be incorrectly connected,
always colour for colour.
Install the shrink tubing 951 2783 in the pressure tool 951 2785 Crimping tool See: Tools and
Equipment/951 2785 Crimping Tool in output "Green". Clamp the pliers enough to hold the shrink
tubing.
Page 849
7/8 AC Pressure Sensor
7/10 Interior Temperature Sensor
7/11 Outside Temperature Sensor
7/12 Sun Sensor, Indication Alarm And Electronic Immobilizer
7/15 Heated Oxygen Sensor

Page 686
- Lift up / detach the holder and seals for the cable harnesses
- Release the connectors.
Main fuse
- Release the holder. See Retainer.
Note! The connectors do not need to be disconnected.
- Remove the nuts for the fuse
- Remove the fuse.
Main fuse location, 11A
1. See the wiring diagram for the relevant model year 2. Decals at respective integrated
relay/fusebox in the car, 3. Pocket data book, 4. Owner's Manual.
Capacitor
Page 801
Hint: When diagnostic trouble code (DTC) E001 is stored, communication with the control module
cannot be established. This can be remedied in two ways.
1. Press the remote control button for local lighting 2. Remove fuse 11C/28 from the fusebox in the
passenger compartment. Reinstall the fuse again.
Continue - Checking the interior lighting
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the interior lighting
Checking the interior lighting (2)
Checking the interior lighting
Two times can be programmed for the interior lighting:
1. Short
- The period from when the door is unlocked, or the engine stops, to when the interior lighting goes
out can be changed if it is too long or too short.
2. Long
- The period from when the door is opened, or a lamp is lit with a switch, to when the lamp goes out
can be changed if it is too long or too short.
To program a long interior lighting period you must step ("click") through the short interior lighting
period programming.
Continue - Programming a short interior lighting period
------------------------
Programming a short interior lighting period
The general lighting and rear reading lamps light and remain lit for 30 seconds when:
- The door has been unlocked from outside with a key or the remote control.
- The engine has been stopped and the ignition key turned to 0.
The default period is 30 seconds. This can be changed to between 5 and 255 seconds.
Page 993
Primary locking
the cable.
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 390
Tool
Page 632
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Transmission Control Module (TCM)

Page 1209
Checking the steering wheel module (SWM)
Before continuing with fault-tracing, the following must be checked:
- All tests for the relevant symptom must have been carried out
- No component, connector or wiring faults etc. should have been detected.
Have all tests been carried out and no faults detected?
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1196
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Hint: If the read button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the read button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.

A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various Concerns/Issues
Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls - TCM Updates For Various
Concerns/Issues
Title Transmission Control Module (TCM) Software (SW)
Ref No US16761.1.7 en-GB
Issuer -
Partner 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group 4378
Func Desc software
Status Released
Reference VIDA, VSTG, RTJs 17906, 20857, 23193
Attachment
Vehicle Type
Page 611
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 117
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 994
Tool
Primary locking
Page 744
kit
- Remove any swarf.
- Detach the bracket and treat the edges of the holes using a rust-proofing agent.
- Tighten the bracket to the side member.
- Tighten the rear bolt/nut to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.).
illustrated.
Page 725
- Route the cable harness along the sides of the cargo compartment and out into the passenger
- Route the cable harness from the left-hand cable duct under the seat cushion over the wheel arch
and continue to the rear edge of the left-hand floor support
- Pull up the tailgate sill trim panel on the left-hand side. Insert the cable harness between the floor
support and the sill trim panel (Illustration B)
- Slide the cable harness in towards the rear crossmember as far as possible. Ensure that the
cable harness does not get trapped (Illustration B)
- Then route the cable harness along the existing cable harness by the rear crossmember and over
to the right-hand side of the car
- Insert the cable harness towards the rear crossmember (over the right-hand side member) as far
as possible
- Route the cable harness along the right-hand side of the cable duct and forward to the existing
ground terminals under the seat cushion
(from the kit)
- Connect the black ground lead (1) to the front ground terminal (2). Use the existing ground
terminal. Tighten to approximately 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.)
- Clamp any excess cable. Use a tie strap from the kit

Page 379
Page 1255
- Ignition on.
trouble code (DTC).
For further information, see Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information,
steering wheel module See: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Reading Off
Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information, Steering Wheel Module.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Page 695
NOTE: The pins are fragile. Check that the connector goes straight down into the control module.
- Install the integrated relay / fusebox.
Ordering software
Order the software.
Program the new control module.

Page 1432
The gear-shift position sensor is mounted on the top of the transmission housing, on the gear shift
linkage rod. The gear selector contains a Park Neutral position (PNP) switch and connectors which
inform the transmission control module (TCM) about which gear is selected and if the back-up gear
is selected so that the reversing lamps can be lit. The gear-shift position sensor is a position switch
which is supplied via +15. A number of trailing contacts supply power to the sensor outputs. The
combination of pins A, B, C and PA indicate the current gear selector position (see the table). The
trailing contacts can either be closed or open. There are diagnostics for the gear-shift position
sensor.
Table for the gear-shift position sensor
The value indicates the position of the gear-shift position sensor (A, B, C and PA), see the table. +
= High signal (open) - = Low signal (grounded)
Gear selector module (GSM)

Page 50
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Page 979
Tool
Page 872
10/1-2 LH And RH Front Lamp Housing
10/3 License Plate Lighting
10/5-8 FL And FR Fog Light

Page 1306
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Page 194

Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump Control Module (Only Vehicles With Demand Controlled Fuel Pumps)
The fuel pump control module powers the fuel pump and regulates the output of the pump. The fuel
pressure changes with the output of the pump.
The fuel pump control module is supplied with battery voltage by the fuel pump (FP) relay and is
grounded in the car body. The fuel pump (FP) relay is controlled by the central electronic module
(CEM) when requested by the engine control module (ECM).
The engine cannot be started if the power supply to the fuel pump control module is faulty because
the fuel pump will not then be powered.
The fuel pump control module is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) via serial
communication. The fuel pump control module then controls the fuel pump by transmitting a PWM
voltage on the ground lead for the fuel pump. This means that the voltage drop across the pump
changes, and with it the output of the fuel pump.
There are no diagnostics for the fuel pump control module. The engine control module (ECM) has
diagnostics for fuel pressure regulation and the associated components.
The pulse width modulated (PWM) signal from the engine control module (ECM) to the fuel pump
control module can be read off using VADIS.
The fuel pump control module is on the outside on the right-hand side of the fuel tank.
Page 1340
The value indicates whether the -button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control resume button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control resume button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control disengage button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control disengage button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search+ button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone search- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone search- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio / carphone volume+ button, status
The value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume+ button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Audio /carphone volume- button, status
This value indicates whether the audio / carphone volume- button is pressed in. Not activated
Activated
Carphone YES button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone YES button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Carphone NO button, status
This value indicates whether the carphone NO button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) right-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button, status
This value indicates whether the road traffic information (RTI) left-hand button is pressed in. Not
activated Activated
Road traffic information (RTI) up button, status

Page 256
8/59-60 RL And RR Head Restraint Solenoid
8/61 Driver Side Airbag Igniter Step 2

Page 630
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1197
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Page 1328
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Ground Terminal for the Steering Wheel Module
Checking the ground terminal for the steering wheel module

Page 593
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 1257
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------

Page 649
Other Relays
Page 786
Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 731
- Insert a screwdriver up between the bracket and the relay box. Turn the screwdriver so that the
bracket expands and, at the same time, pull the relay box from the bracket towards the underside
of the dashboard.
- Lift away the relay box from the bracket and pull it downward under the dashboard.
Replacing relay/shunt
Page 790
pressing the catch through the opening. Use a screwdriver.
- Remove the screw from the control module.
Check
- Screw the control module screw into place.
- Connect the connector for the control module.
- Reinstall the cover for the control module connector.
- Connect the 2 connectors.
- Press the bulb holder into place.
- Install the ground lead.
- Install the 2 screws at the front edge.
- Install the lens.
Ordering software
Order applicable software. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Software

Downloading
Finishing
Program in the data read off from the old control module.
Page 1129
Page 1286
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]

Page 1071
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Service and Repair
Alarm Module: Service and Repair
Replacing the attack alarm control module
Preparatory work
The control module is located behind the left rear wheel arch.
Remove:
- the left side panel in the cargo compartment
- any RTI (road traffic information) modules
- the rear electronic module from the bracket and move to one side.
Removing the alarm control module
Remove:
- two screws for the alarm control module bracket. Disconnect the 2 connectors
- the alarm control module and bracket.
Installing the alarm control module
Install:
- the 2 connectors
- the alarm control module and bracket.
Finishing work
Install:
- the rear electronic module and bracket
- RTI modules
- the side panel and carry out a function check.

Page 751
position 30.
- Tighten the bracket of the accessory electronic module in the rear right hole for the floor support
parallel to the side member as illustrated. On newer cars, there is a foam rubber block on the
right-hand side member. This is to be kept in place and is compressed when the bracket is fitted in
place.
- Remove any swarf.
- Treat the edges of the holes using a rust-proofing agent.

Page 362
correct.
Secondary lock
Pin housing
Release the front housing section on the pin housing by pulling out the rear catches while at the
same time pressing the housing section forwards.
Page 119
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 868
8/76 Gas Tank Valve
8/81 Solenoid, Variable Valve Timing Outlet
8/82 Solenoid, Variable Turbo Geometry
8/85 Thermostatic Switch, Fuel Filter
9/1 Front 12 V Outlet

Page 799
Move the wiring to the outside of the control module. Place the control module in the bracket and
press it down. Install the lock plate. Tighten the screw. Tighten to 10 Nm. Reinstall the side panel.
After consultation with the customer, new software that corresponds to the car can be downloaded.
Software for the accessory electronic module must be downloaded first. Software for the connected
accessories must then be downloaded. Check that no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
stored during the repair.
Replacing the Control Module (UEM)
Replacing the control module
Reading off the programmed values
Note! Read off the programmed values from the upper electronic module (UEM) before replacing
the control module.
Page 964
Connector Data Link Connector (DLC), Repair
Connector data link connector (DLC), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Data link connector (DLC), dismantling
Expose the data link connector (DLC).
Secondary lock
Page 1181
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Locations
Collision Avoidance Module: Locations

Page 1080
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 181
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Adjustments
Sun Roof, Adjusting
Height adjustment Close the sun roof.
Remove the apron molding according to Apron molding.
Slacken off the screws for the glass cover according to Glass cover.
Front edge: The upper section of the molding must be flush with or 1 mm under the roof panel
(Dimension A).
Rear edge: The upper section of the molding must be flush with or 1 mm above the roof panel
(Dimension B).
Calibrate Sun roof module.
Tighten the screws.
Adjusting sideways and front-rear

Page 403
Feel by hand to make sure the shrink tubing is correctly installed. Check that measurement B is
40mm (1-1/2 inches) between the joints from centre to centre.
Note! Remember the cable, colour to colour (with same colour/ single or multi-colored).
Page 1153
with the driver information module (DIM), check the voltage feed and ground for the control module.
VIDA
Other information
Page 887
11D/1-7
11D/8-18
Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 763
- Remove the connector (1) from the terminal (2) above the cable duct under the rear seat cushion
- Connect the connector (3) from the routed cable harness to the terminal (2)
- Connect the connector (4) from the routed cable harness to the disconnected connector (1). Wrap
foam tape (from the kit) around them
- Hide the connectors under the insulation panel
kit
- Tighten to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.)
- Tighten the front mounting for the bracket to the side member. Use a self tapping screw from the
kit
Applies to the V70
- Tighten the bracket for the accessory electronic module in the rear right-hand hole for the floor
support parallel with the side member. See the illustration
Page 730
Body Control Module: Service and Repair Central Electronic Module (CEM), Replacing
Central electronic module (CEM), replacing
Exposing and removing relay box in passenger compartment
Note! Applies to vehicles -2003, All ignition keys are needed when programming a new control
module.
Note! For vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call (see phone's keypad) the battery's minus lead shall
be removed first. Otherwise the automatic alarm for emergency services may be triggered. See
Disconnecting
erase the mileage.
For further information, see Downloading software and replacing the control module See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Downloading
Software and Replacing the Control Module/Central Electronic Module (CEM)
Removing soundproofing panel on driver's side
The central electronic module (CEM) is located as a separate unit in the relay box.
- Loosen the screws, 2 pcs.
Hint: The soundproofing panel is located in grooves by the pedal box.
- Pull the soundproofing panel straight down by the instrument panel.
- Pull back the soundproofing panel.
- Lift out the soundproofing panel.
- Remove the side panel for the fuses on the dashboard's left side (a part of the console is visible).
Removing relay box

Page 341
Connector, see Connectors, repair. See: Connectors, Repair/Connector Type 4
Page 1367
VIDA
Other information
Page 1054
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation
Main Relay (System Relay)
The function of the main relay (system relay) is to supply certain components with voltage.
The relay is mechanical and has a closing function. In the rest position the circuit in the relay is
open.
The main relay terminals (#30 and #86) are supplied with voltage by the battery. When the ignition
key has been turned and the Engine Control Module (ECM) is powered, the terminal (#85) on the
main relay is grounded by the Engine Control Module (ECM).
When the terminal (#85) is grounded, the relay is activated and a number of components are
powered via the relay terminal (#87).
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the main relay.
The main relay is in the relay/fuse box in the engine compartment.

Page 928
54/3LH Connector
54/4 Connector
54/7 Connector
54/8 Connector
54/9 Connector
Page 544
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Service and Repair
Relay kit fog tail lamp + relay kit positive power supply
Page 333
NOTE: Do not fill the protective cover with grease.
- Press grease, P/N 1161417-9, into the female sockets directly from tube
- Check that all the terminal cavities are filled
- Use a loose male pin to ensure that the connection in the sockets is good. The pin should remain
in position when pulled gently.
Open-Circuit, Permanent Faults
Open-circuit, permanent faults
An open-circuit in a cable is indicated by a loss of one or more functions. Chafed and broken
cables or terminals that have come loose are common causes of faults in electrical systems.
[ohm] if there is no open-circuit in the cable
If the reading is not correct. Replace the cable and/or continue, according to "Contact Resistance
and Oxidation"
Page 891
Fuses 11B/11-23
11B/No. Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box
11C Fuses In Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
11C/no. Fuses In Passenger Compartment

Page 496

Page 1246
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading control unit id
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Page 77
Attachment
Page 999
Tool
Page 57
Communications Control Module: Programming and Relearning
New software can be downloaded into the audio module (AUM). New software must be
downloaded when replacing the audio module (AUM). Unlike other control modules, there is no
software available for reloading the audio module (AUM). Only software for the addition of
applications is available. When ordering software, the hardware and the software in the car is
compared to the Volvo central database. If the comparison is OK the software is downloaded into
the audio module (AUM). If the comparison between the car and Volvo central database is not OK,
the database is updated with the car configuration. When this is complete the software is
downloaded. For further information regarding downloading, see Design and Function,
Downloading Software.
Page 46
Page 670
- Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the electrical box
- Disconnect the lower section of the electrical box from the spring strut housing by pressing it in
towards the engine compartment.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see: Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical

Specifications/Starting and Charging.
In reverse order.
Caution! Ensure that the seals are correctly positioned when installing the holder.
Note! Tighten screw 4 in the integrated fuse / relay box. Tighten to 2 Nm.
Page 990
Primary lock
Tool to remove the center cable terminals, as illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully
backwards.
Page 694
free with your fingers. Disconnect the connector. Use an open wrench and a support. See the
illustration.
NOTE: Do not damage the terminal pins. Always check that the control module and control module
box connectors do not have bent or damaged terminals or socket / sleeves. This may have been
the cause of the fault.
Check

Page 1038
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair
Engine control module (ECM), replacing
Special tools:
999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench
Points to observe when replacing the control module
Caution! New software can only be ordered when the control module is installed in the vehicle.
VIDA reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct software.The
software can only be ordered when the new control module is installed in the car.
Caution! Wait 2 minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The main relay must be
voltage-free before the control module can be removed from the car. If the engine cooling fan runs
on after the ignition has been switched off, wait until it stops and then wait for another 2 minutes.
Caution! Always check that the control module and control module box connector pins and sleeves
are not bent or damaged. This may have caused the fault.
Removing the engine control module (ECM)

Page 926
54/51 Connector
54/53 Connector
54/54 Connector
54/55 Connector
54/56 Connector
Throttle Control
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Throttle Control
Throttle Control
To ensure that the correct throttle angle is reached, the engine control module (ECM) controls the
throttle shutter in the throttle unit (6/120), mainly using the signal from:
- accelerator pedal (AP) position sensor (7/51)
- clutch pedal sensor (7/123)
- stop lamp switch (3/9)
- the throttle position (TP) sensor on the electronic throttle unit (6/120)
- brake control module (BCM) (4/16), signal for the brake pedal sensor.
Additional signals and parameters are used to ensure optimum throttle control. For example there
is compensation for the load from the air conditioning (A/C) compressor, load from the transmission
depending on the gear selected (automatic), engine temperature etc. In cars with Four-C
(Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), the throttle characteristic changes depending on the
driving mode selected.
The position of the throttle is measured by two potentiometers, in the throttle position (TP) sensor,
which are on the throttle unit. These are connected, so that potentiometer 1 produces a higher
voltage as the throttle angle increases, while potentiometer 2 does the opposite.
In a combustion engine, the difference between the minimum and maximum airflow is
considerable. The smaller air flows need more thorough regulation, so the potentiometer signal
from potentiometer 1 is amplified approximately 4 times in the engine control module (ECM) before
it reaches the Analog/Digital converter in the engine control module (ECM). This means that there
are three, two real and one fictitious, input signals available to the engine control module (ECM).
These signals are used to determine the position of the throttle and to deploy the damper motor to
the correct position. In general the amplified signal is primarily used for small throttle angles (small
air flows), which are desirable when a high degree of accuracy is required, for idle air trim for
example.
Because the signal is amplified, it reaches its maximum value as early as approximately a quarter
of maximum deployment.
The engine control module (ECM) first uses the signal from potentiometer 1 to measure the throttle
opening. The signal from potentiometer 2 is mainly used to check that potentiometer 1 is
functioning correctly. The engine control module (ECM) then uses the signal to calculate a throttle
angle (actual value). This is the actual throttle angle. The value for the actual throttle angle is used
by those functions in the engine control module (ECM) which depend on this information so that the
throttle can be correctly regulated.
There is an adaptation (learning) in the engine control module (ECM) so that the control module
can calculate how the damper motor needs to be controlled. See "Adaptation of the throttle unit"
below. This adaptation is carried out during manufacture of the car, when the engine control
module (ECM) deploys the throttle disc to the different positions and reads off and registers the
actual values from the potentiometers.
Page 1187
- Ignition off
carphone switch
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 890
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1322
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windscreen-Wiper Switch
Checking the windscreen-wiper switch
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault is not in the
SWM.
Page 1031
Page 932
54/40 Connector
54/40A Connector
54/43A Connector
54/44 Connector
54/45 Connector
Page 743
position 30.

Page 1214
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 983
Tool
Page 555
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 948
The commonest types of connector and central electrical unit in the vehicle are listed here. For
more information about secondary locking, primary locking, terminal removal tools, etc., see the
link by each type of connector.
Note! Before working in the connector, disconnect the battery negative terminal, Battery,
disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery,
Disconnecting.
Note! When several tools are recommended for the same type of connector, choose the correct
tool according to the size of the lock.
Page 218
3/60 Auxiliary Light Switch
3/62 Hood Alarm Contact
3/71 Gear Position Contacts
3/73 Power Child Lock (PCL) Switch

Page 323
54/40 Connector
54/40A Connector
54/43A Connector
54/44 Connector
54/45 Connector
Page 446
Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation
Engine Cooling Fan (FC)/Engine Cooling Fan (FC) Control Module
The engine cooling fan (FC) has two functions. One is to cool the engine compartment, the other is
to cool the condenser when the air conditioning (A/C) compressor is working.
The engine control module (ECM) transmits a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to the engine
cooling fan (FC) control module. The control module then activates the fan at different speeds. The
speed of the engine cooling fan (FC) is determined by the engine control module (ECM),
depending on the coolant temperature (based on the signal from the engine coolant temperature
(ECT) sensor) and the vehicle speed.
The temperature conditions for engagement of the different engine cooling fan (FC) stages may
vary slightly, depending on the engine variant and the equipment level.
The temperature conditions apply when:
- the A/C is off
- no faults are detected by the Engine Control Module (ECM).
WARNING: The engine cooling fan (FC) may start itself for some time after the engine has been
switched off. This is normal.
The engine cooling fan (FC) and its control module are behind the radiator.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the engine cooling fan (FC). The fan can be
activated using VADIS.
Page 1068
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 770
- Remove all relays and shunts bridged to the control module. Note the locations.
Page 405
951 2620 Stripping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2620 Stripping Tool See information about
stripping length. Refer to: Junction sleeve See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring
Harness/Service and Repair/Junction Sleeve
Page 1016
Caution! Protect the surroundings from the heat.
951 2850 Hot air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951 2850 Hot Air Gun 951 2851 Hot-air gun See:
Tools and Equipment/951 2851 Hot-Air Gun 951 2777 Hot-air gun See: Tools and Equipment/951
2777 Hot-Air Gun
Cable Shoe
Cable shoe
Information
Page 967
Press in the active catches on both sides of the socket housing and slide out the receptacle
housings.
Primary lock
Page 726
- Remove the connector (1) from the terminal (2) above the cable duct under the rear seat cushion
- Connect the connector (3) from the routed cable harness to the terminal (2)
- Connect the connector (4) from the routed cable harness to the disconnected connector (1). Wrap
foam tape (from the kit) around them
- Hide the connectors under the insulation panel
kit
- Tighten to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.)
- Tighten the front mounting for the bracket to the side member. Use a self tapping screw from the
kit
Applies to the V70
- Tighten the bracket for the accessory electronic module in the rear right-hand hole for the floor
support parallel with the side member. See the illustration
Page 1211
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the readout of tailgate wiper status was OK, the fault was caused by a damaged fuse or
relay. The fuse can blow if relays are activated in the wrong order. This can happen when the key
is turned from position I to position II and the wiper arm is activated at the same time.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing the wiper switch: Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair
Page 204
Part 2 Of 2
Note! It is important that the breakout box is connected and that the ground terminals have been
checked before readings are taken.
Page 559

Page 1050
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 889
Fuses 11A/1-7
11A/No. Main Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box
11B Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Diagnostic Functions
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation Diagnostic
Functions
Diagnostic functions
General
A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module detects a fault. 35 diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) can be stored. A fault which is detected in the most recent operating cycle is defined
as permanent. Other faults which are detected are defined as intermittent.
trouble codes (DTCs) can only be erased once all the diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have been
read off at least once.
output signals. For further information about parameters, see Description of parameters See:
Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/Description of Parameters.
Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information
This function can be used to read parameters, status identifiers and counters stored at the same
time as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). These are called frozen values. For further information,
see Frozen values steering wheel module, description See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool
Testing and Procedures/Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module, Description.
Reading the control module identification
VIDA identifies control modules by reading off a number of codes from the control module memory.
The codes contain the following information about the control module:
- hardware P/N (control module without software)
- hardware serial number (control module without software)
- software P/N

Page 796
Check
compartment.
Ordering software
Replacing the Accessory Electronic Module
Replacing the accessory electronic module
Removal
Page 1317
Condition
module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate wiper.
Fault symptom[s]
- The rear windshield wiper motor does not operate.
Checking the Tailgate Wiper
Checking the tailgate wiper
Checking components
Activate the tailgate wiper using the wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the wiper switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
No - Replacing components
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing components
Check the tailgate wiper fuse; replace as necessary. Replace relay 2/16.
Other information:
- For further information about the fuses and relays, see the Wiring Diagram
- To access the relay/fuse box in the cargo compartment: Relay/fuse box cargo compartment/Rear
electronic module (REM), replacing See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse
Block/Service and Repair/Integrated Relay/Fusebox Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module
(REM), Replacing
Page 609
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 480
Other Relays
Page 15
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System overview
Control module
The audio module (AUM) manages functions for:
- Radio reception AM and FM
- CD playback (if the control module / car has either a CD player or a CD changer)
- Cassette playback (if the control module is equipped with a cassette player)
- Mini-Disk play back (option, Japan only)
- TV reception (option, certain markets)
- RDS reception (certain models and markets)
- Voice information from the Road Traffic Information system, RTI (road traffic information) (option,
market dependent).
The audio module (AUM) is mounted in the Audio Box in the center console. The control module is
integrated with the sound unit. They are replaced as one unit. There are three different sound units:
- HU-4XX- Integrated radio, cassette player and internal amplifier (4x25W)
- HU-6XX- Integrated radio, cassette player, CD player and internal amplifier (4x25W). Available
options: external amplifier and external CD changer
- HU-8XX- Integrated radio, 4 disc CD-changer, internal amplifier (1x25W) for the center
loudspeaker and requires an external amplifier (4x50W). An external CD changer is available as an
option.
The CD player has next/previous track, fast search forwards and backwards and random play
(RND - random). The cassette player has next/previous track, fast forward and backward and
random play (RND - random). The Mini-disk player (option, Japan only) has next/previous track,
fast search forwards and backwards and random play (RND - random). The audio module (AUM)
communicates with directly connected components and with other control modules and
components connected via Controller area network (CAN) communication. RDS-reception (Radio
Data System) is possible (market dependant) during FM transmissions. In the USA, the system is
called RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System). The loudspeakers in the front and rear doors are
connected to the control module or to an external amplifier if applicable. The loudspeakers in the
parcel shelf (S60/S80) and in the D-post (V70/V70XC) are also connected to the control module or
to an external amplifier (if applicable). There are three different loudspeaker options:
- Base Performance
- High Performance
- Premium sound (not available for the S80).
The control module continually checks both its internal operations and its input and output signals.
A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored in the control module memory if the control module
detects a fault in any of these. The diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be read off using the
diagnostic tool via the data link connector (DLC) in the car. The audio module (AUM) has an
internal communication system called Melbus. There is communication between the audio module
(AUM), CD changer, Road Traffic Information Module (RTI) and the TV receiver. Melbus comprises
three different signals:
- MSCK, the clock signal
- MDATA, the data signal which transmits information
- MBUSY, indicates whether the data signal is busy or not.
For information, also see Signal specifications.
Signals
Page 721
- Slide the entire cargo compartment carpet forward slightly. Twist slightly to remove the carpet
through the tailgate opening
Applies to the S60
- Press the centre of the clips at the lower edge of the foldable side panel on the left-hand side until
they click
- Remove the two clips
- Remove the plastic nut at the front and lower edges of the side panel
Applies to the S60
- Turn the handle (1) on the right and left-hand sides through 90°.
- Fold the side panels down. Lift the panels out
- Pull the tailgate sill trim panel (2) forwards on the right and left-hand sides until the clips on each
side release. Pull hard but carefully. The panel is securely positioned
- Remove the wiring (3) for the cargo compartment lighting
- Pull the sill trim panel straight up until the four clips on the underneath release. Remove the sill
trim panel.
Page 652
Remove:
- the felt cover
- the 2 clips using a screwdriver and remove the cover
- the engine control module (ECM) and the transmission control module (TCM).
Intermediate section
Locations

Page 248
7/122 Microwave Motion Sensor (MMS) Alarm
7/123 Clutch Pedal Sensor
7/124 Brake Pedal Sensor
7/135 Glass Breakage Sensor, LH

Page 1012
Feel by hand to make sure the shrink tubing is correctly installed. Check that measurement B is
40mm (1-1/2 inches) between the joints from centre to centre.
Note! Remember the cable, colour to colour (with same colour/ single or multi-colored).
Page 419
Check:
STC or not)
hydraulic modulator
Installation
Installing the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 1410
TJ Instruction No 16761
Page 1184
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 767
The central electronic module (CEM) is located as a separate unit in the relay box.
- Loosen the screws, 2 pcs.
Hint: The soundproofing panel is located in grooves by the pedal box.
- Pull the soundproofing panel straight down by the instrument panel.
- Pull back the soundproofing panel.
- Lift out the soundproofing panel.
- Remove the side panel for the fuses on the dashboard's left side (a part of the console is visible).
Removing relay box

Page 254
8/37 Automatic Transmission
8/38-41 Shift Solenoid 1, 2, Lock-up Solenoid And Pressure Solenoid

Locations

Page 886
11C/26-31
11C/32-38
11 D-E/no. Fuses In Cargo Compartment

Page 1300
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Locations

Page 973
Primary lock
Tool
Page 1381
Connector B
Page 937
Combined these give a component designation, for example, 3/2.
There is a list of components, where, with the help of the component designation, you can read off
the name of the component, for example, 3/2 = light switch. See: Diagrams/Diagram Information
and Instructions/Diagram Legend
List of type numbers
The list shows which type of component that respective type numbers refer to, for example, 3/x =
switch, 6/x = electric motor, etc.
1 Battery
2 Relay
3 Switch
4 Control module
5 Combined instrument panel
6 Electric motor
7 Sensor
8 Actuator
9 Heating element
10 Light
11 Fuse
15 Distribution rail
16 Audio
17 Service/diagnostics
18 Contact reel
19 Meter
20 Ignition component/shunt
31 Ground connection
53 Junction point
54 Connector
B. Junction points
The wiring diagrams contain numbered junction points, e.g. 53/352.
This information contains a section with a list of junction points. This list shows all the components
that are connected to each junction point. See: Power and Ground Distribution/Branching
Point/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
The location of the junction points is shown in the "Cable harness routing in vehicle". See:
Locations/Harness Locations
C. Connectors
Connectors provide a bridge between two cables harnesses and are described in the "Connectors
Views". See: Diagrams/Connector Views
D. Electrical distribution
Operation of the fuses and relays is shown in the "Electrical distribution". See: Power and Ground
Distribution/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
E. Data communication
Today's cars are equipped with a CAN network, which transmits information. Connections to this
network are shown in their entirety on the respective wiring diagrams. Complete information on
CAN communication is can be found in the section titled "Data communication". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams
F. Abbreviations
A number of different abbreviations are used in this information. These are explained in the section
"Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations". See: Diagrams/Diagram Information and
G. Component location
The appearance and location of components is described in alphabetical order at the Vehicle Level
component locations "A - Z Component List". See: Locations/Component Locations/A - Z
Component List
Wire Color Code and Other Abbreviations

Page 517
Verify functionality 3
Verify the function of all brake lights, tail lights, rear fog light, and reinstall cargo compartment Trim
panels.
Page 765
- Press the control module onto the bracket by the side member.
- Slacken off the rear screw (1) in the bracket for the accessory electronic module a few turns
- Insert the grooved end of the lock facing (2) under the screw head. Position as illustrated
- Tighten the screw. Tighten to 10 Nm (8 lbf. ft.).
- Install the fuse from the kit in position 11 in the fuse holder.
- Reinstall the panels in the cargo compartment
- Reinstall the two screws in the tailgate sill trim panel
- Reinstall the side cushion
- Fold the backrest back into place
- Reinstall the seat cushions.

Page 245
7/82 Heated Oxygen Sensor, Diagnosis 1
7/84 Tank Pressure Sensor
7/91 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
7/100 Vehicle Inclination Sensor ISM
7/105 Outside Temperature Sensor, Engine Control Module

Page 238
6/95 Damper Motor, Temperature, LH Side
6/96 Damper Motor, Temperature, RH Side
6/102 Damper Motor, Defroster
6/103 Damper Motor, Floor/Ventilation

Page 1075
Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump (FP) Relay, (2002-2004)
For information about the fuel pump (FP) relay for model year 2005-, see Design and Function,
central electronic module (CEM).
The following applies for model year 2002-2004
The fuel pump (FP) relay supplies the fuel pump with power. The relay also cuts the power to the
pump when the ignition is switched off or if the engine stops. In cars with demand controlled fuel
pumps, the above function applies to the fuel pump control module. The central electronic module
(CEM) also cuts the power to the relay if the supplemental restraint module (SRS) transmits a
message indicating that an airbag has deployed.
The central electronic module (CEM) activates and deactivates the relay when requested by the
engine control module (ECM) (via the Controller area network (CAN)).
When the ignition is switched on, the engine control module (ECM) sends a signal to the central
electronic module (CEM) via the controller area network (CAN) to run the fuel pump (FP) for one
seconds. This is so that the pressure increases in the fuel system, shortening the start time.
When the flywheel in the engine rotates (generating a signal from the engine speed (rpm) sensor),
the engine control module (ECM) will transmit a request to the central electronic module (ECM) via
the Controller area network to start the fuel pump (FP). In the event of the engine stopping, the
Engine Control Module (ECM) cancels the activated fuel pump signal. The central electronic
module (CEM) then switches off the fuel pump (FP).
There is a directly connected cable between the engine control module (ECM) and the central
electronic module (CEM). In the event of a fault in the Control area network (CAN), this cable is
used for the "activated fuel pump" signal.
Page 249
7/136 Glass Breakage Sensor, RH
7/137 Glass Breakage Sensor, Tailgate
7/143 Fuel Level Sensor, Pump Side
7/149 Rain Sensor

Page 1302
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1084
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 1433
The gear selector assembly is in the tunnel console. It is mechanically connected to the
transmission by a cable which moves the gear valve in the transmission control system. The gear
selector module (GSM) is positioned on the top panel of the gear selector assembly. The gear
selector module (GSM) uses serial communication to communicate with the transmission control
module (TCM) to light the gear position indicator. The indication occurs via LEDs in the top panel.
The gear selector control module (GSM) communicates with the central electronic module (CEM)
to activate the shift-lock. The shift-lock solenoid power supply and ground is directly connected to
the gear selector module (GSM). The "W" switch in the gear selector assembly top panel is
positioned on the printed circuit board for the gear selector module (GSM) and activates Winter
mode. There are diagnostics for the gear selector module (GSM). Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
are stored in the transmission control module (TCM) in the event of a fault.
Gear selector assembly for AW55-50
There are two new types of gear selector assembly for the AW55-50. There is one gear selector
assembly with seven positions and one with the Geartronic-function.
Gear selector assembly with 7 positions
The gear selector has seven positions with the following functions: -
P Park position
- R Reverse position
- N Neutral position
- D Automatic shifting between all gears. (Does not apply when the mode selector is in winter mode
(W), for further information see, Function/Shifting program/Winter mode)
- 4 Fifth gear is blocked in this mode
- 3 Fourth and fifth gear are blocked in this mode
- L Only first and second gear function in this mode. (Speed variation depends on which engine the
transmission is working with and does not apply when the mode selector is in winter mode (W), for
further information see, Function/Shifting program/Winter mode).
Gear selector assembly with Geartronic function
The gear selector assembly with Geartronic has a unique appearance and function. In addition to
P/R/N/D modes it also has "manual" (MAN) shifting mode. The gear selector for Geartronic has the
following functions: -
P Park position.
- R Reverse position
Steering Wheel Mounted Remote Control for the Radio
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Mounted
Remote Control for the Radio
Steering wheel mounted remote control for the radio

Preparations
- Remove the ignition key.
Note! Wait at least five minutes before disassembling the connectors or removing other equipment.

Page 1318
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the readout of tailgate wiper status was OK, the fault was caused by a damaged fuse or
relay. The fuse can blow if relays are activated in the wrong order. This can happen when the key
is turned from position I to position II and the wiper arm is activated at the same time.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing the wiper switch: Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
Switches/Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair
Page 621
Power Protection Relay: Locations Relay, 151 Feed, Rear
2/52 Relay, 151 Feed, Rear

Page 1232
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Contents
- Frozen values steering wheel module, description See: Frozen Values Steering Wheel Module,
Description
Note! The parameters that can be read off for the steering wheel module display how the steering
wheel module interprets the position on the buttons and control stalks. In the event of a fault in the
buttons or the wiring, the status will be constantly On or Off depending on the position on the
buttons and control stalks.
High beam flash, status
The value is displayed if the high beam flash is activated. Not activated Flash Rocker position high
beam / low beam
Read button, status
The value indicates if the read button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Reset button, status
The value indicates if the reset button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Right-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the right-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Left-hand indicator lamps, status
This value indicates whether the left-hand indicator lamps are activated. Not activated Activated
Cruise control on / off button, status
This value indicates whether the cruise control on / off button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Cruise control +button, status
This value indicates whether the +button is pressed in. Not activated Activated
Page 1226
Page 168
Ordering software
Finishing
Page 1162
Were any defects found?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
If there is a malfunction on the wiper switch or its connector in the Steering wheel module (SWM)
this may affect the direction indicator function. Disconnect the wiper lever and see if the direction
indicator function starts to work. Remedy as necessary.
Other information
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate washer.

Page 1435
Control Module: Description and Operation Function
Function Controlling the shift solenoids when shifting
Shifting and the lock-up function is controlled by activating the solenoids in a specific pattern. The
solenoids S1 -S5 determine which gear is to be used and the SLS, SLU and SLT solenoids
determine engagement by adjusting hydraulic line pressure. The basic parameters for the different
shifting points are the accelerator pedal (AP) position and the vehicle speed. The shift quality is
decided by the control of torque. The pressurization of the clutches and the brakes are adjusted by
reading the changes of the speed of the transmission input shaft during the shifting process and
comparing them to the values calculated in the transmission control module (TCM). Two shifting
patterns can be selected, normal conditions and winter mode (selected using the button). In normal
mode shifting and lock-up occur at relatively low speeds to reduce fuel consumption. In the event of
rapid accelerator pedal movements, the transmission control module (TCM) automatically shifts to
sport mode.
Shifting patterns
Shifting program Economy mode
When driving at normal acceleration the transmission control module (TCM) uses a pre-set shifting
program, optimized to shift for economy driving. This shifting program is suitable for "normal"
driving which provides earlier up shifts and lock-up. In addition the transmission oil pressure is
adjusted to provide smooth gear engagement.
Sport mode
The transmission switches from economy mode to sport mode if the accelerator pedal (AP) is
pressed down quickly. The conditions are that the throttle opens and the vehicle speed exceeds 50
km/h. As soon as the accelerator pedal (AP) is moved less quickly economy mode is resumed. In
the sport mode shifting program the shifting points are adjusted to provide the best possible
performance. Down shifting occurs at lower engine speed (RPM).
Extreme mode
At wide open throttle (WOT) the kick-down function is engaged and the transmission shifts to the
lowest possible gear. In this way a boost of power is achieved when overtaking for example.
Winter mode
Winter mode is selected using the (W) button on the top panel of the gear selector assembly.
Winter mode enables starting off in a high gear to prevent the wheels from spinning on a slippery
surface. This mode can also be used in other difficult situations in which the driver needs more
direct control over gear selection. Depending on the gear position, the following combinations can
be obtained: -
D The car starts in 3rd gear. Automatic shifting between 3rd, 4th and 5th gears
- 4 The car starts in 3rd gear. Automatic shifting between 3rd and 4th gears occurs earlier than in
economy mode, D position. 5th gear is locked out
- 3 The car starts in 3rd gear. There is no upshifting or downshifting
- L The car starts in 2nd gear. There is no upshifting or downshifting.
The warning lamp on the dashboard lights when winter mode is selected. If kick-down is activated
in Winter mode, the transmission uses all gears for maximum performance.
Other modes Adaptation
The transmission control module (TCM) monitors each shift during all driving conditions to fulfill
optimal and smooth shifting. This is carried out by the control module either lowering or increasing
the hydraulic line pressure used during the shift itself. The changed pressure levels are stored in
the control module memory when the car has been switched off and are retrieved on start-up. This
provides improved shifting comfort and increased service life. Adaptation occurs when the following
conditions have been met: -
Throttle opening is steady
- Oil temperature between 65°C and 110°C.
Catalytic converter start

Page 1022
Page 257
8/62 Belt Tensioner Igniter, Center Rear Seat
8/64 Solenoid Valve, Engine Mounting
8/66-67 LH And RH Inflatable Curtain Igniter

Page 682
- Disconnect the electrical box from the spring strut housing by pressing it in towards the engine
compartment.
Removal
Location of fuse, 11B

Central Electrical Unit Engine Compartment
Relay Box: Service and Repair Central Electrical Unit Engine Compartment
Central electrical unit, engine compartment, replacing
Removal
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery, Replacing.
Cover
Page 1267
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
- Faulty turn signal lamp switch.
Fault symptom[s]
- Direction indicators, malfunction
Checking the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the Steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 1166
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Audio / Carphone Switch
Checking the audio / carphone switch
Checking components
- Ignition on.
correct result, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Page 863
8/37 Automatic Transmission
8/38-41 Shift Solenoid 1, 2, Lock-up Solenoid And Pressure Solenoid

Page 817
2/32 Engine Management System Main Relay
2/33 Relay, Fuel System

Page 776
Disconnect the catches. Lift the upper panel from the control module.
Note! Check that the control module's connectors are intact.
Installing the driver door module (DDM)
Install the upper panel. Position the control module in the hole on the door panel. Check that the
lower mounting for the control module is correctly located in the support on the door panel. Press
the control module into place.
Install:
- the connectors
- the nut and screw
Door Side Panel.
Ordering software
Finishing
Initialise the window position in the communication input.
Driver's Door Module / Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM), Replacing
Driver's door module / passenger door module (DDM/PDM), replacing
S60 2001-, V70 2001-, V70XC 2001-, XC90
- Replacing the driver's side door module. See Driver door module (DDM), replacing See: Driver
Door Module (DDM)
- Replacing the passenger side door module. See Passenger door module (PDM), replacing See:
Passenger Door Module (PDM).
S80, V70 2000:
- Replacing the driver and passenger side door modules. See Door module (power windows, power
mirrors, child locks, central locking), front doors See: Door Module (Power Windows, Power
Mirrors, Child Locks, Central Locking), Front Doors.
Integrated Relay/Fusebox Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module (REM), Replacing

Integrated relay/fuse box cargo compartment/rear electronic module, replacing
Integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo compartment

Page 788
Rear view mirror, replacing
Note! A rear view mirror with manual function cannot be replaced with automatic anti-dazzle or vice
versa. The car will store diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
The upper electronic module (UEM) is integrated in the rear view mirror. To remove the rear view
mirror, see or the rear view mirror.
Replacing the upper electronic module (UEM), or the rear view mirror
Preparations
Note! Read off data from the control module before replacing the control module. Program this data
back into the new control module.
Programmed data is read off via VIDA vehicle communication.
- Remove the lens.
- Remove the 2 screws at the front edge.
- Press the 2 rear catches forward.
- Press two of the catches on one side inwards. Remove the bulb holder.
- Disconnect the 2 connectors.
Page 1030
- fuel trim
- throttle angle
- etc.
A function is limited so that the system still functions, to protect components or for safety reasons
(for example the throttle angle).
Any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the control module memory. The data can be
read off using VADIS.
Signals The table below summarizes the input signals to and output signals from the Engine
Control Module (ECM). The signal types are divided into directly connected signals, serial
communication and controller area network (CAN) communication. The illustration below displays
the same information with the Volvo component designations.
Page 610
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 233
6/26 Generator
6/28 Motor, Passenger Compartment Fan
6/29 Motor, Electric Cooling Fan
6/30 Washer Pump, Rear Window
6/32 Rear Window Wiper Motor

Page 29
------------------------
Page 350
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Release the secondary lock. Use electrician's screwdriver as illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 972
Socket housing
illustrated.
Page 1212
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the tailgate wiper switch status is OK the fault is in the tailgate wiper.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
- For replacing and programming and replacing the control module: Steering wheel module (SWM),
replacing See: Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 1218
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the wiper switch
Other information:
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 938
Abbreviations
Groups
Group 23 = Fuel system
Group 26 = Cooling system
Group 27 = Engine controls
Group 32 = Generator and voltage regulator
Group 33 = Starting system
Group 35 = Lighting
Group 36 = Additional electrical equipment
Group 37 = Wiring and fuses
Group 38 = Instruments
Group 39 = Other
Group 43 = Transmission
Group 59 = Brake system
Group 64 = Steering
Group 83 = Doors and openings
Group 84 = Exterior decorative elements etc.
Group 85 = Interior equipment
Group 87 = Climate controls
Group 88 = Internal equipment
Ignition switch symbols
x = Accessories (audio position)
S = Powered upon insertion of key
15 = The switch remains connected during start
15l = Contact is broken while starting
30 = Constant power from the battery
50 = Start
Countries/Markets
A = Austria
AUS = Australia
B = Belgium
CDN = Canada
CH = Switzerland
D = Germany
DK = Denmark
E = Spain
EU/OS = Markets outside USA and Canada
FIN = Finland
GB = Great Britain
ISR = Israel
J = Japan
KOR = Korea
N = Norway
NL = Netherlands
S = Sweden
USA = United States of America
WEU = Western Europe
Other
ACC = Accessory
AMP = Amplifier
AUDIO = Audio system
AUTO = Automatic transmission
BIX = Bi-Xenon
CEM = Central Electronic Module
DENSO = Fuel control system, gasoline
DSTC = Dynamic Stability Traction Control
E.E = Early edition

Page 229
4/70 Upper Electronic Module UEM
4/76 Remote Control Unit For Garage Door Opener
4/78 Accessory Electronic Module AEM

Page 340
Relays, General
Relay Box: Application and ID Relays, General
The relay locations are given two or three different designations in the wiring diagram. This is
described below.
Relays General
Page 1396
Remove the 2x M8 screws. Disconnect the 2x connectors. Remove the control module and the
bracket.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical

Installing the suspension module (SUM)
Connect the 2x connectors. Install the 2x screws. (M8). Tighten.
Finishing work
Fold the carpet back into position. Install the panel for the center console. The Suspension Module
(SUM) must be programmed after replacement.
Ordering software
Finishing
Note! After replacing the Suspension Module (SUM), the position sensors and the resistance of the
shock absorbers must be calibrated.
Read off and erase any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored during the replacement. Test the
function.
Page 152
- Remove the lens
Page 307

Recall - Brake Light Relay Replacement
Brake Lamp Relay: Recalls Recall - Brake Light Relay Replacement
V70 (01-)/V70 XC (01-) 2002
Section
Group
36
No 0024
Year 2004
Month
02
Recall Campaign No.131 Brake Light Relay
Background:
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC and Volvo Cars of Canada, Ltd. have decided that a defect
related to motor vehicle safety exists in the rear left and right brake light relays of certain model
year 2002 V70 and V70 XC (Cross Country) vehicles. In some cases, the brake lights may not
function when the brake pedal is depressed or may stay on continuously. In both cases, the high
positioned brake light and all other tail lights will not be affected.
The corrective action will be to replace the brake relay with two relays of a modified design.
Competence requirement
Volvo Level 1 Technician

Material
Relay 2 8651661
Service: All affected vehicles must have two new relays installed in the rear electronic module
(REM) as described below.
Removing the original relay 1
Remove the left rear cargo compartment trim panel in order to access the Rear Electronic Module.
With the ignition off, REMOVE the RELAY installed in position RMI 5 and position RMI 6 in the
REM, which controls both brake lights and the rear fog light as shown.
Installing replacement relays 2
Install TWO new relays, part number 8651661 in the REM positions RMI 5 and RMI 6 as shown.
Page 1471
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1298
-------------------------------------------------
Activate reset button on indicator switch and read status.
Hint: If read-out of status on read and reset button gave a correct result the fault is not in the
indicator switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Page 420
into place.
Install:
Brakes/Service and Repair
Function test
Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Wheel Sensor Front, Replacing.
Page 1111
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 594
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 657
Relay Box: Service and Repair Exposing And Removing The Relay Box In The Passenger
Compartment
Exposing And Removing The Relay Box In The Passenger compartment
NOTE: For cars with Volvo On Call (see the carphone keypad), the battery negative lead must be
disconnected first. Otherwise an automatic alarm call may be made to the emergency services.
mileage.
car. VADIS reads off the new control module identity which is required to order the correct software
NOTE: Key codes must be programmed before the central electronic module will accept the keys
that belong to the car. This is carried out in "Add / Remove keys" via VADIS vehicle
communication.
Page 760
Applies to the V70
- Remove the foldable panels on the left and right-hand sides of the cargo compartment.
Applies to the V70
- Remove the cover and the screw from the front edge of the left-hand side panel. Remove the
left-hand side panel
- Fold the panel inwards. Lift the panel out
Applies to the V70
Applies to the V70

Page 1051

Page 1193
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK, the fault is in the turn signal lamp switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
AUM Diagnostic Functions
Communications Control Module: Description and Operation AUM Diagnostic Functions
AUM diagnostic functions
General
The control unit has built-in diagnostics, Volvo Diagnostics, that continually monitor the control unit
and the input and output signals.
Diagnostic trouble codes
If the control unit detects an error, it stores a diagnostic trouble code. There are 36 diagnostic
trouble codes in total. An error that was detected the last time the engine was running is defined as
permanent. Other detected errors are defined as intermittent.
Reading and erasing diagnostic trouble codes
Stored diagnostic trouble codes can be read and erased using this facility. Erasing diagnostic
trouble codes can only be done when all the diagnostic trouble codes have been read at least
once.
Reading and erasing the user information
Stored user information can be read and erased using this facility.
-4201 Focusing error
- CD inserted the wrong way
- Condensation in CD-player or on disc
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD player
-4203 Servo error
- Read-out error in CD player
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD player
-42F1 Disc feed error
- Dirt in CD compartment
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD player
-42F3 Pick-up error
- Faulty CD player
- Condensation on MiniDisc or in MiniDisc player
- Faulty MiniDisc
- Faulty MiniDisc player

-4303 Servo error
- Read-out error in MiniDisc player
- Faulty MiniDisc
- Dirt in MiniDisc player
- Faulty MiniDisc
-43F3 Pick-up error
- Condensation on CD or in 4-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
- Faulty 4-disc CD changer

Page 833

Page 844
6/44 Cooling Fan, Electrics Box, Engine Compartment
6/48 Damper Motor, Recirculation

Page 179
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Testing and Inspection
Sun roof module (SRM), calibrating
Calibration
Calibrating the sun roof module (SRM)
The sun roof must be closed. Ignition in position I.
Press the sun roof switch so that the sun roof is in the tilt position. Release the switch.
Press the switch (in the tilt position) in again for at least 5 seconds so that the sun roof closes.
Release the switch. The calibration is complete.
Note! If the sun roof has not moved to the correct position, carry out calibration again.
Hint: If the sun roof has still not moved to the correct position: Press the sun roof switch so that the
sun roof moves to the rearmost position (completely open). Release the switch. Press the switch
(in the completely open position) in again for at least 5 seconds so that the sun roof closes.
Release the switch. Close the sun roof and carry out calibration again. See steps 1 and 2 above.
For further information on the sunroof, see

Page 1040
- Check that no pins or sockets are damaged on the connector.
- Carefully press the control module down into the grooves on the inside of the control module box.
Press to the limit position
- Insert tool 999 5722 Wrench See: Tools and Equipment/999 5722 Wrench around the control
module.
- Move the upper section of the tool forwards as far as it will go. Pull up the tool
- Press the cover into place over the control modules
- Check that the air ducts are correctly positioned.
Ordering software
Note! After downloading the software or replacing the engine control module (ECM), the throttle
unit must be adapted according to vehicle communication input: "Adapting the throttle unit".
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair. Test drive the car.
Check the function of the engine.
Page 1470
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 579
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Interior lighting and upper electronic module, replacing
Replacing the lens and the bulb Removal
- Fold down the cover. See illustration
- Press the catches outwards. Remove the lens
Replacing the lens and the bulb Installation
- Install the bulb
- Press the lens into place
The upper electronic module is integrated in the rear view mirror. For more information about
removing the rear view mirror.
Removal
- Remove the lens
Page 1014
951 2620 Stripping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2620 Stripping Tool See information about
stripping length. Refer to: Junction sleeve See: Power and Ground Distribution/Wiring
Harness/Service and Repair/Junction Sleeve
Page 1347
network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the low and high-speed cables
between the diagnostic outlet and central electronic module (CEM) are connected to the rest of the
network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the central electronic module (CEM). This
relay is only found on vehicles of model year -2004.
above.
Control modules

VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 37
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
First Generation Power Seats
Power Seat Control Module: Service and Repair First Generation Power Seats

Remove the key.
Install:
- the connector
- the key
Page 1003
- Take out the screw, washer, nut and bracket from the kit.
- Place the bracket over the drilled hole with the text (1) facing backwards. Mark out to cut off the
corner of the bumper cover as illustrated.
- Cut off the corner.
- Fit the bracket (with the text (1) facing backwards), with the screw, washer and nut. Do not tighten
the bracket yet.
- Place the connector on the bracket as illustrated.
- Adjust the position of the bracket with the connector and tighten the screw/nut correctly.
Connector Relay Box, Repair
Connector relay box, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Preparatory work
Page 490
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 1285
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Contact Reel
Checking the contact reel
Disconnect the contact reel from the steering wheel module (SWM). Take resistance readings
between terminals #B2 and #B3. The resistance must be infinite. Check the cable between terminal
#B1 and contact reel terminal #1. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B2
and contact reel terminal #2. Check for an open-circuit. Check the cable between terminal #B3 and
contact reel terminal #3. Check for an open-circuit. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- For information about signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
Diagnostic Parameters/Connecting the Breakout Box, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
- To access or replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing
Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring And Terminals.
Page 253
8/32 Igniter, Passenger Side Airbag Stage 2
8/33-34 FL And FR Belt Tensioner Igniter
8/36 Shift Lock Solenoid

Page 1362
- Ignition on or start the engine.
Activate reading off of the parameters: Click on the VCT2000 symbol. For information about the
different parameters, see Description of parameters See: Scan Tool Testing and
Procedures/Description of Parameters.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault

Page 1160
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking components
Hint: If the direction indicator switch status is OK the problem is in the Steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 888
11E/1-7
11A Main Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Page 1194
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read Button on the Indicator Switch
Checking the read button on the indicator switch
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault is not in the SWM.
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing.

-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on read button gave a correct result the fault was in the indicator switch.
Page 303

Page 837
4/56 Central Electronic Module CEM
4/58 Rear Electronic Module REM

Page 1082
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 1086

Page 823
2/118 Rear Power Window Relay
2/119 Right Rear Power Window Down Relay
2/120 Relay - Power Windows, Power Child Lock Rear Door
2/138-139 Deadlock Relay, LH/RH Rear Door
2/152 Relay, Daytime Running Lights

Page 997
illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary lock
the cable.
Secondary lock
Connector Fuse Holder, Repair
Connector fuse holder, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Preparatory work
Expose the relevant fusebox. Remove the fuses. Note the positions of the fuses.
Dismantling
Secondary lock
Releases the catches for the secondary lock. Slide the secondary lock to one side to access the
primary lock, as illustrated.
Page 1069
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 1249
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet

(DIM).
references above.
Control modules
Page 406
Junction sleeve
951 2785 Crimping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2785 Crimping Tool
Page 691
identity which is required to order the correct software
NOTE: Remove fuses 11C/32, 11C/25 and 11C/21 before disconnecting the control module
connector.
damaged terminals or sleeves. This may have been the cause of the fault.
NOTE: Do not damage the terminal pins.
- Remove all relays and shunts bridged to the control module.

Page 936
A. Component designation
Every component has a component designation that consists of two parts.
The first part is a type number that describes the type of component in question, for example 3/xx.
The second part of the designation is a serial number, for example, x/2.
Locations
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 930
54/16 Connector
54/20 Connector
54/21 Connector
54/24 Connector
54/25 Connector
Page 1292
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
control switch is functioning the fault is outside the steering wheel module.
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Page 758
- Slide the entire cargo compartment carpet forward slightly. Twist slightly to remove the carpet
through the tailgate opening
Applies to the S60
- Press the centre of the clips at the lower edge of the foldable side panel on the left-hand side until
they click
- Remove the two clips
- Remove the plastic nut at the front and lower edges of the side panel
Applies to the S60
- Turn the handle (1) on the right and left-hand sides through 90°.
- Fold the side panels down. Lift the panels out
- Pull the tailgate sill trim panel (2) forwards on the right and left-hand sides until the clips on each
side release. Pull hard but carefully. The panel is securely positioned
- Remove the wiring (3) for the cargo compartment lighting
- Pull the sill trim panel straight up until the four clips on the underneath release. Remove the sill
trim panel.
Page 250
7/153 Sensor, Fuel Level LPG
7/156 Pressure And Temperature Sensor ONG
7/159 Air Quality Sensor
7/162 Pressure Sensor, Fuel Line

Page 49
FAULT-TRACING FAILED - FAULT-TRACING FAILED
Attempt New Test - Connecting the breakout box
-------------------------------------------------
Reading the User Information, AUM
Reading the user information
Reading the user information, AUM

- Ignition on.
- If the audio unit is equipped with a cassette player: insert a tape and select cassette deck with the
"SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit is equipped with a CD player: insert a CD and select CD with the "SOURCE"
knob.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a CD changer: insert a CD in the CD changer and select CD
Changer with the "SOURCE" knob.
- If the audio unit is equipped with an MD player: insert an MD and select MD with the "SOURCE"
knob
Activate user information read-out by clicking on the VCT 2000 symbol.
- For more information about user information, see AUM diagnostic functions See: Description and
Operation/AUM Diagnostic Functions.
Page 841
6/17 Driver Seat Motor, Up/down Front Edge
6/18 Driver Seat Motor, Up/down Rear Edge
6/19 Driver Seat Motor, Forward/backward
6/20 Passenger Seat Motor, Forward/backward
6/25 Starter Motor

Page 116
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 226
3/171 Switch, Retractable Door Mirrors
3/173 Switch, Trunk Lid Private Lock
3/174 Switch, Reduced Alarm
3/183 Switch, Max Defrost

Page 1067
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 809
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Unit
Electronic Throttle Unit
The electronic throttle unit, using the control signal from the engine control module (ECM),
regulates the amount of air for engine combustion. This is done using an electronic shutter.
The electronic throttle unit consists of a round throttle disc on a shaft. This is turned using a DC
motor (damper motor), gear wheel and two springs, an opening spring and a return spring. The
damper motor is controlled by the engine control module (ECM) and is supplied with power by an
integrated power stage in the control module. At one of the limit positions the throttle disc is closed
so that no air can pass the throttle unit. At the other limit position the throttle disc is parallel to the
air flow so that the air is able to freely pass through the throttle unit. The throttle disc shaft is
mechanically connected to two built-in potentiometers (position sensors) which are supplied with
power by the control module. The signals from the potentiometers provide the control module with
data about the position of the throttle disc. The electronic throttle unit has a connector with six gold
plated pins.
NOTE: A damaged terminal pin surface can interfere with the function
1. Current channels, potentiometers 2. Contact strips, potentiometers 3. Spring 4. Spring 5. Throttle
disc 6. Damper motor 7. Gear wheel 8. Gear sector 9. Connector.
The electronic throttle unit is located on the engine intake manifold.
In the event of a fault, the throttle unit must be replaced as a single unit.
The engine control module (ECM) can diagnose the electronic throttle unit.
Page 215
2/158 Locking Relay, Rear Doors, Filler Flap
3/1 Ignition Switch
3/4 Cruise Control Switch SWS
3/6 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
3/8 Heated Rear Window/door Mirror Switch

Page 908
17/19 12 V Outlet, Cargo Compartment
18/4 Contact Reel
20/3-7 Spark Plug And Ignition Coil
20/16 Capacitor
20/22-26 Glow Plug

Page 383
Page 826
3/37 Horn Contact
3/47 Parking Brake Contact
3/53 Recirculation Switch
3/56 Fan Switch
3/59 Control, Beam Adjustment

Page 297
16/71 Window Antenna Amplifier 1 Right
16/73-74 Window Antenna Amplifier 2 Left/Right
16/77 Microphone, Mobile Telephone

Page 912

Page 607
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 985
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 6
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 154
screwdriver
Check Check that the control module connectors are intact.
- Install the lens.
Finishing Program in the data read off from the old control module.
System Overview
Control Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System overview General
AW55-50 (and AW50AWD) is a 5-speed electronically controlled automatic transmission with a

lock-up function for the three highest gears. The transmission control module (TCM) adapts the
gear changes to ensure that the correct gear is selected for the driving mode, engine load, driver
requirements, speed etc. This gives good fuel economy combined with increased comfort by
ensuring smoother gear changes and lower noise levels. The transmission control module (TCM)
receives information about the desired gear position and driving mode from the driver. In
conjunction with the signals from a number of sensors in the transmission and the engine control
system, unlike with a purely hydraulically controlled transmission, this allows the control module to
calculate the optimal shifting points and engagement of lock-up. The control module allows for
small changes in the operating conditions and adapts the various transmission functions to ensure
that the correct gear is always selected in relation to the driving mode selected by the driver. This
adaptability guarantees smooth and consistent gear shift quality throughout the operational life of
the transmission. In order to precisely determine the gear shift and lock-up engagement points
based on the driving mode selected, the control module receives and processes information about
the following: -
Selected gear position - from the gear-shift position sensor

- Selected driving mode economy/sport - reactive function programmed in the control module which
is controlled by the speed at which the accelerator pedal (AP) is depressed. Quick "pedal
movement" = sport mode. Winter (W) mode is activated using a switch on the gear selector
assembly
- Vehicle speed - from the brake control system via the Controller area network (CAN)
- Transmission input shaft rpm - from the transmission speed sensor
- The transmission output shaft rpm - from the transmission output speed sensor
- The engine speed (RPM) and torque and throttle opening - from the engine management system
via the Controller area network (CAN)
- If the brake pedal is depressed and to what extent - from the brake control system via the
Controller area network (CAN)
- If the accelerator pedal (AP) is depressed and to what extent - from the engine management
system via the Controller area network (CAN)
- Transmission fluid temperature - from the temperature sensor in the transmission
- Engine coolant temperature - from the engine control module (ECM) via the Control area network
(CAN).
Components
Page 371
Page 417
Function test
Warning! No ABS, stability and traction control functions are available when there is
communication with the Brake control module (BCM) (Volvo Diagnostics are activated). ABS
warning lamp flashes for as long as the diagnostics are activated. To cancel the diagnostics before
test driving the vehicle, the ignition must be switched off!
See: Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Page 439
into place.
Install:
- the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2
See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake
Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Function test
See Wheel sensor, front, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Headlamp Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Description of frozen values
Explanation
Frozen values are parameter values that are stored when a diagnostic trouble code is generated.
Not all parameters can be read out for all diagnostic trouble codes. The parameter values can only
be read if they can provide additional information on the prevailing conditions when the code was
generated.
Total mileage, value
Measurement range: 0-1,000,000 km The value indicates the vehicle's total mileage when the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) was generated.
MECU power supply, value
Measurement range: 0 - 63 V Normal range: 12.0 - 14.5 V The value indicates the power supply to
the central electronic module (CEM) when the diagnostic trouble code was generated.
Measurement range: -40 till +215 °C The value indicates the passenger compartment temperature
when the diagnostic trouble code was generated.
Measurement range: -40 till +215 °C The value indicates the outside temperature when the
diagnostic trouble code was generated.
Power supply mode, status
The value indicates the status of the power supply mode when the diagnostic trouble code was
generated. Key removed Key recently removed Key approved Ignition off after Accessory position
Accessory position Accessory position after Ignition on Ignition on Running Start attempt Signal
missing
Speed, value
Measurement range: 0 to 255 km/h (158 mph). Indicates speed when the diagnostic trouble code
was generated.
Steering wheel angle, value
Measurement range: -780 to +780 °. Indicates current steering wheel angle. The normal value
when the steering wheel and front wheels point straight ahead is approx. 0°.
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble
Codes
-------------------------------------------------
Reading off extended fault-tracing information, steering wheel module

Page 96
Lower spring seat, installing 2
Clean the lower spring seat of the strut assembly and spray with underbody protection 1381063.
Install the lower spring seat on the spring strut. First position the lug (1) in the hole. Then position
lug (2) in its hole and pull the collar through the hole.
Check that the shock absorber support plate (1), spring seat(2) and rubber bump stop with boot (3)
are free of damage. Replace if necessary.
Cut off any casting beads from the spring seat to facilitate installing the insulation. Clean the spring
seat before installing the insulation. Install the insulation in the spring seat.
Important!
When installing the spring, check that the spring ends are against the lugs in both the upper and
lower spring seats. The surface (1) must lie against the spring seat bump stop.
Spring, installing 5
Installing Spring, see VADIS Repairing and installing Function group 72, Suspension
WARRANTY STATEMENT: Claims may be submitted under the New Car Warranty when there is a
documented customer complaint, using claim type 01.
Page 1240
network. First when communication takes place on this cable, the low and high-speed cables
between the diagnostic outlet and central electronic module (CEM) are connected to the rest of the
network in the vehicle. This is controlled via a relay in the central electronic module (CEM). This
relay is only found on vehicles of model year -2004.
above.
Control modules

VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 1376
VIDA
Other information
Page 1132
Page 769
- Replace relay/shunt.
Relay position
For position of relays, see:
1. Wiring diagram for model year in question 2. Decals by respective relay and fuse box in the
vehicle 3. Pocket Data booklet 4. Driver's manual
- Press the relay box forward so that the catches engage in the bracket and "click".

Preparations
erase the mileage.
Note! Before disconnecting the control module's connector, remove fuses 11C/32, 11C/25 and
11C/21.

Page 388
illustrated. At the same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary lock
the cable.
Secondary lock
Connector Fuse Holder, Repair
Connector fuse holder, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Preparatory work
Expose the relevant fusebox. Remove the fuses. Note the positions of the fuses.
Dismantling
Secondary lock
Releases the catches for the secondary lock. Slide the secondary lock to one side to access the
primary lock, as illustrated.
Page 1186
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 178
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams
Sun roof (sun roof module (SRM))
Connector A, terminals #A1-#A10
The following values are measured between the relevant terminal in column 1 and terminal #A5
(signal ground) unless otherwise stated.
U = DC in volts (V). Ubat = battery voltage in volts (V). Ulow = Voltage close to 0 V.
Page 82
SW = Software
DESCRIPTION:If the customer experience strange behavior from the navigation system i.e. black
screen at start up, restart, reset, arrow not moving, strange route choices, abnormal ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) etc, always start with upgrading the unit to the latest software. By doing
this we can eliminate already corrected problems from earlier software.
PRODUCT MODIFICATION:
New SW 09w14 (C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-, XC90 MY 2007-) New SW 10w20 (S80 MY2007-,
V/XC70 MY 2008-, XC60 MY 2010-)
SERVICE: Check the SW version prior to an SW upgrade. If the unit already has the latest SW the
SW upgrade will not work.
For S80 -06, S60, V70, XC70, XC90, C30, C70, S40 and V50. Use the latest software upgrade
CD-ROM P/N 31266835.
In S60, V70, XC70 and S80 - MY 2006 (CU-P2001) the SW will be upgraded to version 14.05.
In C30, S40, V50, C70 -2007 and XC90 -MY 2006 (MMM) the SW will be upgraded to version
14.04.
In XC90 MY 2007-2009, C30, S40, V50, C70 MY2008-2009 (MMM+) Use the latest software
upgrade CD-ROM P/N 31310029. The SW will be upgraded to version 1404/2400
For P3 cars i.e. S80 MY 2007-, V70 MY 2008-, XC70 MY 2008- and XC60 MY 2009- use the latest
software upgrade DVD-ROM. There are four different P/N depending on region. P/N 30630953 US.
The SW will be upgraded to version 8BC6.
Note:
This is a Service SW disc only. It will NOT update map data
39725-2 Software road traffic information module (RTI) upgrade. See VSTG for time allowance.
Page 982
Primary lock
Page 122

Page 976
Tool
remove the primary lock, as illustrated. Pull the cable carefully backwards.
Page 542

Page 1028
Page 1378
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 1081
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1202
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the RTI Switch Unit
Checking the RTI switch unit

Page 1348

(DIM).
references above.

Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 141
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 1389
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Module
Steering wheel module
Preparations
Note! Disconnect the battery lead.
Note! Wait three minutes before starting work.
Ignition on to turn the steering wheel to the correct position.
Removing the steering wheel module
Turn the steering wheel a 1/4 turn so that the two holes on the rear of the steering wheel are
accessible.
Insert a screwdriver in the hole on the rear at right angles to the reverse of the steering wheel. Put
the screwdriver point against the top of the spring clip as illustrated. Pry the screwdriver up against
the upper edge of the hole (2) so that the point of the screwdriver presses down the catch (1) until
the catch releases. Turn the steering wheel a 1/2 turn in the opposite direction. Repeat the process
on the other side. Turn the steering wheel to the neutral position. Fold out the steering wheel
module.
Page 205
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations

Page 208
2/32 Engine Management System Main Relay
2/33 Relay, Fuel System

Page 727
Applies to the V70
- Ensure that the cable harness, previously routed over the side member, is positioned as close to
the rear crossmember as possible. This is to prevent the cable harness being trapped by the floor
support or the two support feet for the floor support
electronic module. Use the three M6 screws. Tighten the screws. Tighten to 10 Nm (8 lbf.ft.)
Applies to cars equipped with a Diversity antenna amplifier
- Wrap foam tape around the cable / wiring for the antenna amplifier.
- Take the accessory electronic module from the kit. Connect the cable and connector previously
routed along the right-hand side member.

Page 462
Note! If any of the outer hooks break off, this must be "rectified".Tape the 3.5 mm thick component
measuring 20 x 20mm on the back of the comfort panel. Use double-backed adhesive tape.Fix the
other side of the piece with double-backed adhesive tape so that there is a solid anchorage when
reinstalling against the centre console.
Front panel, replacing

Page 400
Note! Cable should always be connected colour for colour, single colour to single colour or multiple
colors to multiple colors. The cables must NOT under any circumstances be incorrectly connected,
always colour for colour.
Install the shrink tubing 951 2783 in the pressure tool 951 2785 Crimping tool See: Tools and
Equipment/951 2785 Crimping Tool in output "Green". Clamp the pliers enough to hold the shrink
tubing.
Page 860
7/172 Position Sensor, Camshaft, Intake Side
7/173 Sensor, Camshaft
8/3 Solenoid Switch AC
8/6-10 Injectors
8/17 EGR Valve

Page 719
- Remove the clip (1) at the side of the left-hand side cushion
- Pull the top edge of the left front cargo compartment panel out to access the upper lock for the
side cushion
Applies to the S60
- Remove the left-hand side cushion. First press in the catches (1) at the top edge of the reverse of
the side cushion. Pull the cushion out slightly
- Grasp the cushion using both hands. Twist counter-clockwise until the catches on the inside
release
- Remove the side cushion. First pull out the upper edge of the side cushion. Then pull upwards
Applies to the S80
- Insert your hand down the side of the lower section of the side cushion. Remove the left-hand
side cushion
- Release the catches. At the same time lift the side cushion
- Place the cushion to one side
Applies to the V70

Page 24
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading off audio module diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)

2 - Checking communication problems
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
Page 813
Page 138
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1472
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 570
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 739
Body Control Module: Service and Repair

Page 1434
- N Neutral position
- D Automatic shifting between all gears. (Does not apply when the mode selector is in winter mode
(W), for further information see, Function/Shifting program/Winter mode)
- MAN Manual shifting. There are three hall sensors on the gear selector module (GSM). A
permanent magnet on the gear selector lever affects the output signals of the sensors to the gear
selector module (GSM).
Page 642
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 754
- Cars with manual gearboxes: Remove the ignition key

equipment.
- Remove the seat cushion (1). First pull the front edge of the seat cushion up. Pull the cushion
forwards. Then lift the seat cushion out.

Page 45
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Locations
Backup Lamp Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 493
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 111
Navigation Module: Service and Repair
Road traffic information module (RTI), replacing
Removal
Hint: Try the latest edition of the DVD before replacing the road traffic information module (RTI).
The software on the DVD may solve problems with the control module. Then reinsert the old DVD
to see if the fault persists.
- Remove the left-hand side panel in the cargo compartment
- Remove the screw holding the control module
- Unscrew the bracket from the control module.
Installation
- Screw the control module into place on the bracket
- Screw the bracket into place in the car
- Install the connectors
- Install the left side panel in the cargo compartment.
Ordering software
Finishing
Check that no diagnostic trouble codes have been stored during the repair.
Page 998
Fuse holder cargo compartment.
Fuse holder passenger compartment.
Primary lock
Page 881
10/149 RH Rearview Mirror Lighting
10/150 Rear Reading Light
10/43,50 RH And LH Brake Light
10/46,53 Fog Light, Right And Left Rear
10/47,54 RR And RL Direction Indicator

Page 1010
Note! The sleeve must sit in the correct output of the pressure tool, position "Green".
Feed the end of the wire in the shrink tubing that is held by the pliers. Feed the wire into the shrink
tubing until it stops, make sure that the wire insulation does not go near the clamp on the sleeve or
the stripped wire will protrude outside the sleeve.
Page 935
Page 259
8/76 Gas Tank Valve
8/81 Solenoid, Variable Valve Timing Outlet
8/82 Solenoid, Variable Turbo Geometry
8/85 Thermostatic Switch, Fuel Filter
9/1 Front 12 V Outlet

Page 435
Check:
STC or not)
hydraulic modulator
Installation
Installing the control module on the ABS hydraulic modulator

Page 367
Tool
remove the primary lock, as illustrated. Pull the cable carefully backwards.
Page 118
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1335
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Information

------------------------
Page 991
Release the inner housing section on the socket housing by lifting the sleeve beside the catch and
pulling the housing section outwards. Disconnect the cable terminals. Use tool 951 2812 Terminal
removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal Removal Tool or951 2637 Terminal
removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal Removal Tool , as illustrated. At the
same time pull the cable carefully backwards.
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Slide the receptacle housing into the connector. Press the secondary lock into place.

Removal Tool.
correct.
The connector has no secondary lock.
Primary lock
Page 14
-4403 Servo error
- Read-out error in 4-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
- Dirt in CD compartment
- Faulty CD
-44F2 Error in selecting CD
- Faulty CD
-44F3 Pick-up error
-4501 Cassette feed error
- Dirt in cassette compartment
- Faulty cassette
- Faulty cassette player
- Condensation on CD or in 10-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
-4603 Servo error
- Read-out error in 10-disc CD changer
- Faulty CD
- Faulty CD cartridge
- Faulty CD
-46F2 Error in selecting CD
- Faulty CD
-46F3 Pick-up error
Reading the control unit identification
VIDA identifies control units by reading the number of codes from the control unit memory. The
codes contain information on the control unit:
- hardware component number (control unit without software)
- hardware series number (control unit without software)
- software component number
- diagnostic software component number

Page 839
5/1 Combined Instrument Panel DIM
6/1 Windshield Wiper Motor
6/2 Windshield Washer Pump

Page 437
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair Replacing the Control Module for ABS and Dynamic
Stability and Traction Control (DSTC)
Replacing the control module for ABS and dynamic stability and traction control (DSTC)
Preparation
Disconnect the battery lead
See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and

Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing
See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing, B5254T2 See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS
Unit, Replacing.
Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit
See Replacing the brake pipe between the hydraulic unit, front wheel and junction , B5254T2 See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Replacing the
Brake Pipe Between the Hydraulic Unit, Front Wheel and Junction.
Removal
Remove the control module
Remove:
Carefully lift the control module.
Check the control module

Page 800
- Ignition on
- Click on the symbol for VCT2000 to read off the programmed values.
The retained values are programmed customer parameters in the upper electronic module (UEM).
The retained values should be noted for later use.
Other information
- For information about programming the customer parameters, see Diagnostic functions See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Description and Operation/Upper Electronic Module
(UEM)/Diagnostic Functions.
Continue - Replacing control modules and downloading software
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing control modules and downloading software
Caution! A new control module is delivered without software. In order for the control module to
function new software must be programmed into the control module after it has been replaced.
Replace the control module and download the new software. See Upper electronic module (UEM)
rear view / door mirror, replacing See: .
Page 305

Page 1278
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1430
Line pressure solenoid, SLS
The line pressure solenoid, SLS is in the transmission control system, which is mounted on the
front edge of the transmission. The line pressure solenoid, SLS consists of an electrical coil which
controls a hydraulic valve. The solenoid is controlled by pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage and
is grounded via the transmission control module (TCM). The hydraulic function of the solenoid is
linear. The hydraulic valve is controlled by the varied current which is the result of the current pulse
conditions. During high pulse conditions, (at high currents (approximately 1 A)) the line pressure is
low. During low pulse conditions (at low currents) the line pressure is high. In the event of an
open-circuit the line pressure reaches maximum which causes hard shifting. The hydraulic valve is
then completely open. There are diagnostics for the solenoid.
Line pressure solenoid, SLT
The line pressure solenoid, SLT is in the transmission control system, which is mounted on the
front edge of the transmission. The line pressure solenoid, SLT consists of an electric coil which
controls a hydraulic valve. The solenoid is controlled by pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage and
is grounded via the control module. The solenoid is linear. The hydraulic valve is controlled by the
varied current which is the result of the current pulse conditions. During high pulse conditions, (at
high currents (approximately 1 A)) the line pressure is low. During low pulse conditions (at low
currents) the line pressure is high. The solenoid also engages and disengages neutral control. In
the event of an open-circuit the line pressure reaches maximum which causes hard shifting. The
hydraulic valve is then completely open. There are diagnostics for the solenoid.
Transmission input speed sensor (speed of the input shaft)
The transmission input speed sensor (speed of the input shaft) is on the top of the transmission
housing. The sensor is an active sensor and is supplied
Page 598
Other Relays
Page 290
15/24 Distribution Rails
16/1 Audio
Page 854
7/82 Heated Oxygen Sensor, Diagnosis 1
7/84 Tank Pressure Sensor
7/91 Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
7/100 Vehicle Inclination Sensor ISM
7/105 Outside Temperature Sensor, Engine Control Module

Page 958
Fuse holder in passenger compartment/cargo compartment. See Connector fuse holder, repair
See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/Connector Fuse Holder, Repair.
Connector Brake Control Module (BCM), Repair
Page 377
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 689
- Remove the screws on the left and right sides of the electrical box
- Disconnect the lower section of the electrical box from the spring strut housing by pressing it in
towards the engine compartment.
Installation
Note! For tightening torques, see: Tightening torque See: Specifications/Mechanical

In reverse order.
Caution! Ensure that the seals are correctly positioned when installing the holder.
Note! Tighten screw 4 in the integrated fuse / relay box. Tighten to 2 Nm.
Removing the Relay Box
Removing The Relay Box

Page 1372
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - digital display
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Page 338
- Ignition off
- Press grease, P/N 1161417-9, into the terminals directly from the tube
- Check that all the cavities in the connectors are filled
- Use a loose male pin to ensure that contact in sockets is good. The pin should remain in position
when pulled gently.
Connector
Connectors, repair
correct.
Connector
Page 558

Page 1288
- Ignition off
- Ignition on.
Other information:
Repair/RTI Switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Page 672
Remove:
- the felt cover
- the 2 clips using a screwdriver and remove the cover
- the engine control module (ECM) and the transmission control module (TCM).
Intermediate section
Page 31
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Reading Off Extended Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Information, Audio Module
Reading off extended diagnostic trouble code (DTC) information, audio module
Reading off extended fault-tracing information, radio module

Page 871
9/25 Rear 12 V Outlet
9/25 Rear 12V Outlet
9/32 FTC Resistor - Air Preheating
9/32 PTC Resistor - Air Preheating

Page 1210
Condition
module.
Possible source
- Defective tailgate wiper.
Fault symptom[s]
- The rear windshield wiper motor does not operate.
Checking the Tailgate Wiper
Checking the tailgate wiper
Checking components
Activate the tailgate wiper using the wiper switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the wiper switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
No - Replacing components
-------------------------------------------------
Replacing components
Check the tailgate wiper fuse; replace as necessary. Replace relay 2/16.
Other information:
- For further information about the fuses and relays, see the Wiring Diagram
- To access the relay/fuse box in the cargo compartment: Relay/fuse box cargo compartment/Rear
electronic module (REM), replacing See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse
Block/Service and Repair/Integrated Relay/Fusebox Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic Module
(REM), Replacing
Page 628
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 19
The 4X50W amplifier is positioned under the right-hand front seat. It is used to amplify the audio
output signal. The external amplifier is an option for the HU-4XX and HU-6XX. The amplifier is
installed as standard with the HU-8XX.
Bass speakers
An extra bass speaker with an integrated amplifier (option) is available as an option on the
V70/V70XC. This is mounted in the cargo compartment and supplemented with two loudspeakers
in the D-posts.
CD changer (option)
The CD changer is mounted on the left-hand side of the cargo compartment. The changer can take
ten discs in a special magazine. The CD changer has disc selection, next/previous track, and
random play (RND - random). The CD changer is controlled by the audio module (AUM) and is
connected to the control module by connectors. The signals between the audio module (AUM) and
the CD changer are transmitted via Melbus communication. The V70/V70XC cannot be equipped
with both the road traffic information system (RTI) and the CD changer.
Remote control
Body Control Module: Testing and Inspection
Connecting breakout box, rear electronic module (REM)
- Ignition off
- Expose the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
- Remove fuses 11D/1 and 11D/2 from the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
- Release the locking hooks on the top of the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment
- Fold the integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment downwards / inwards. The
integrated relay / fusebox in the cargo compartment can now be removed
- Slacken off the screw holding the rear electronic module (REM) connector so that it can hang free
- Disconnect the rear electronic module (REM) connector. The connector may be stiff.
Connect the adapter between the rear electronic module (REM) and its connector. Connect the
breakout box to the adapter. Breakout box wiring 951 1503.
Disconnect the breakout box in reverse order.
NOTE: Before the rear electronic control module can be checked and measurements taken, the
removed fuses must first be installed.
Page 241
7/16 Coolant Temperature Sensor
7/17 Mass Airflow Sensor MAF
7/23-24 Rear/Front Knock Sensor

Page 325
54/56 Connector
54/65 Connector
54/79 Connector
54/106 Connector
How to Use the Wiring Diagrams

Page 857
7/122 Microwave Motion Sensor (MMS) Alarm
7/123 Clutch Pedal Sensor
7/124 Brake Pedal Sensor
7/135 Glass Breakage Sensor, LH

Page 1141
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation System Overview
System overview
Control module
The steering wheel module (SWM) has the task of managing the signals for those functions which
can be controlled via the steering wheel control stalks and buttons. The signals are transmitted to
the relevant control modules via the control area network (CAN). The actual functions are not in the
steering wheel module (SWM). The steering wheel module (SWM) manages the control signals for
the following functions:
- Volume control and CD track / radio selection
- Volume control during hands free carphone calls and menu selection for the phone module (PHM)
- Menu selection for traffic information
- Front windshield wipers/washers
- Rear windshield wiper/washer (V70, V70XC/XC70 and XC90)
- Cruise control
- Turn signal lamps

- High and low beam
- Trip computer and displaying / erasing text messages in the driver information module (DIM).
removed to replace the control module. Control stalks, key pads and switches can be replaced as
separate units. Cars with DSTC also have a steering wheel angle sensor installed in the contact
reel in the steering wheel module (SWM). For further information, see Design and Function,
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module (SAS). The steering wheel module (SWM) communicates
with directly connected components and communicates with other control modules via the Control
Area Network (CAN). The control module checks activations and input and output signals via an
integrated diagnostic system. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module
detects an error. In certain cases the control module replaces the faulty signal with a substitute
signal. Any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are stored in the control module memory. This
information can be read off using VIDA via the data link connector (DLC) in the car. A simple way
to ensure that the steering wheel module (SWM) is powered and grounded is to flash the headlamp
high beam or to change the audio or carphone volume. For further information, also see Signal
specifications.
Signals
Page 1177
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 808
The throttle angle is regulated so that the actual angle (actual value) is the same as the angle
calculated by the engine control module (ECM) (desired value). The engine control module (ECM)
also uses the values that were stored during adaptation of the throttle angle, and the actual signals
from the potentiometers.
The damper motor is controlled by a power stage integrated in the engine control module (ECM)
using a pulse width modulation (PWM) signal. The torsion from the opening and return springs in
the throttle unit is also used. If there is a fault in the engine control module (ECM) so that the
throttle unit cannot be operated or supplied with power, the springs in the throttle unit will turn the
throttle disc to the limp home position (return position). This return position gives a throttle angle
large enough to allow the car to be driven to a workshop, although with considerably reduced
drivability.
Throttle angle The throttle angle is usually gauged by potentiometer 1. For small angles the
amplified signal is used to obtain a clearer signal. The engine control module (ECM) also monitors
the throttle unit signals from the potentiometers to check that they are plausible, that they are within
the minimum and maximum limits and that the signals correspond to the same throttle angle. If
there is a difference in the signals, a fictitious throttle signal is calculated from the load signal, the
engine speed (rpm) and the prevailing conditions, particularly pressure and temperature.
The potentiometer whose signal is closest to the calculated throttle angle will then be assumed to
be correct. The other potentiometer is then classified as not functioning and a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) is stored. The system then constantly monitors the throttle angle of the remaining
potentiometer in comparison to the calculated throttle angle. If there is a difference between these
values, the engine control module (ECM) will not rely on any of the throttle unit potentiometers. The
power stage in the throttle unit is then disengaged, and the throttle switches to limp home mode
(return position).
Adaptation of the throttle unit Normally the engine control module (ECM) adapts the throttle unit
during manufacture of the car. There are a number of other occasions when the throttle unit must
be adapted. A new adaptation is obviously required if the throttle unit or the engine control module
(ECM) is replaced, but also if the software in the engine control module (ECM) is replaced. This is
because the adaptation values are stored in the EEPROM memory in the control module, at a
predetermined location in the memory for each software. These storage locations may vary
between different software, in which case a new adaptation will be required. The final reason for
adaptation is that the values for the throttle unit may have changed during its service life. Therefore
there is a routine which begins adaptation of the throttle unit if the car is left with the engine off and
the throttle on for 30 seconds (and other basic conditions for adaptation of the throttle unit are met).
A new adaptation is then carried out. If the "new" values are different from the "old" values, the new
values are used. Adaptation usually takes place automatically when the engine control module
(ECM) detects that the adaptation has not been run or that the values from a previous adaptation
are outside certain tolerances. However a number of basic conditions must be met to ensure that
the adaptation is carried out correctly:
Basic conditions for adaptation of the throttle unit:
- ignition on/engine off
- battery voltage above 10 V
- accelerator pedal (AP) released (unaffected)
- the car must be stationary (no speed signal)
- engine coolant temperature (ECT) between 5 and 100 degree C
- intake air temperature (IAT) above 5 degree C.
During adaptation, the engine control module (ECM) checks that the values obtained are within
reasonable limits. This helps to determine whether the throttle unit is functioning correctly or not.
When the adaptation has been carried out, all relevant values are stored in the EEPROM memory
in the control module so that they can be retrieved if the power supply is broken. This means that if
the battery is replaced for example, a new adaptation is not necessary.
Page 980
Page 260
9/2 Heated Rear Window
9/12-13 Left And Right Seat Heater

Page 1327
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
and Repair.
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 1357
VIDA
Other information
Page 781
- Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. See Removing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
- Unscrew the screw holding the connector so that it is free of its threads. Check that the screw is
free using your fingers
- Disconnect the connector. Use an open spanner and a support. See the illustration.
Page 828
3/74-77 LH/RH/Front And Rear Door Lock Unit
3/78 Trunk Lid Lock Unit

Page 787
control module by pressing the catch through the opening. Use a screwdriver.
- Remove the bulb holder together with the rear view mirror and control module.
Installation
- Connect the connector for the rear view mirror and control module.
- Reinstall the cover for the rear view mirror and control module connector.
- Connect the 2 connectors.
- Install the ground lead.
- Press the bulb holder into place.
Caution! Check that the microphone cable is not trapped (if applicable).
- Install the lens.
Replacing the switch for the interior lighting
Removal
- Remove the lens. See Replacing the lens and the bulb.
- Remove the bulb holder. See Replacing the bulb holder in the rear view mirror unit.
- Remove the bulbs.
- Remove the screws.
- Remove the back piece from the switch.
- Detach and remove the printed circuit board and switch.
To replace the switch for the sun roof, see Switch, sun roof, replacing, M58, M66, M66 AWD,
AW50/51 AWD, AW55-50/51SN, M56 See: Body and Frame/Roof and Associated
Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Sunroof / Moonroof Switch/Service and Repair.
Installation
- In reverse order.
Page 572
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 476
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 363
Socket housing
illustrated.
Page 596

Page 580
control module by pressing the catch through the opening. Use a screwdriver
Replacing the bulb holder in the rear view mirror unit Installation
- Connect the connector for the rear view mirror and control module
- Reinstall the cover for the rear view mirror and control module connector
- Install the lens.
Replacing the switch for the interior lighting Removal
- Remove the lens.
- Remove the bulb holder.
- Remove the bulbs
- Remove the screws
- Remove the back piece from the switch
- Detach and remove the printed circuit board and switch.
To replace the switch for the sun roof.
Replacing the switch for the interior lighting Installation
- In reverse order.
Replacing the rear view mirror (upper electronic module)
NOTE: A rear view mirror with manual function cannot be replaced with automatic anti-dazzle or
vice versa. The car will store diagnostic trouble codes
Locations
Transmission Control System Relay: Locations

Page 545
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 920
53/### Junction Point

Junction Points
Locations for the junction points can be found within the Harness Locations images at the vehicle
53/### Junction Points
Junction Points
locations for the junction points can be found within the Harness Locations images at the vehicle
54/No. Connector
54/1B Connector
54/3LA-G Connector
54/3LH Connector
Page 263
10/1-2 LH And RH Front Lamp Housing
10/3 License Plate Lighting
10/5-8 FL And FR Fog Light

Locations

Page 416
Press the control module up so that the terminal pins connect.
Install:
- the screws.
Tighten to 1.8 Nm
- the connector on the control module. Lock the connector
- the integrated relay/fusebox and the connector for the ABS unit. See Brake pipe master cylinder /
ABS unit, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service
and Repair/Brake Pipe Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing
- the integrated relay / fusebox.
Tighten the screw. Tighten to 10 Nm
Installing the battery lead
Install the battery cable. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Loading software
Note! Switch on the ignition.
Visual check
Turn on the ignition. Wait five seconds and until the symbol for the brakes on the dashboard has
gone out. In the event of a fault (the symbol is lit). Check that the connector is connected.
Page 1046
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 780
- Expose the relay and fuse box, see instruction Exposing the integrated relay/fusebox in the cargo
compartment.
- Release the catch on the top as illustrated. Fold down the integrated relay / fusebox and lift up to
release it.
- Install the integrated relay / fusebox. Ensure that the catches on the top engage correctly
- Install the upholstery
- Reinstall the floor hatch.
Rear electronic module (REM)
Preparations

Page 318
54/65 Connector
54/79 Connector
54/106 Connector
54/1B-106 Connectors
54/1B Connector
54/3LA-G Connector
Page 772
- Check that the connector cover is correctly positioned. Remedy if necessary.
- Install relays and shunts.
Ordering and programming software
Order and program software following the table below.
Finishing
example). This is performed via VIDA vehicle communication.
service reminder indicator (SRI) according to Resetting the service reminder indicator (SRI) See:
Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator/Service
and Repair
module ID for the central electronic module (CEM), rear electronic module (REM) and engine
control module (ECM) via VIDA vehicle communication.
Other information
Ground Distribution/Locations
Door Module (Power Windows, Power Mirrors, Child Locks, Central Locking), Front Doors
Door module (power windows, power mirrors, child locks, central locking), front doors
Replacing the driver door module (DDM) and passenger door module (PDM)
Preparations
reads off the new control module identity
Relay Box: Locations Fuse/Relay Identification and Location
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 1266
Checking the windshield washing
Checking components
Hint: If the read-out of the status of the wiper switch gave a correct result, the problem is not in the
Steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Hint: If the windshield wiper switch status is OK, the fault is in the windshield wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information
Page 568
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 40
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - radio module

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 304

Page 1457
The hydraulic section consists of 1-5, the mechanical section consists of 6-10 and the electronic
section consists of 11-13. 1. Pressure valves 2. Accumulator 3. Oil filter 4. Annular pistons 5.
Control valve/axial solenoid 6. Input shaft 7. Inner and outer wet multi-plate clutch 8. Inner
connection hub with sinusoidal cam disc 9. Rollers with annular pistons
10. Output shaft 11. Electrical feed pump 12. Differential electronic module (DEM) 13. Oil pressure
and temperature sensor.
The differential electronic module (DEM) is integrated in the coupling unit. The differential
electronic module (DEM) communicates with other control modules using controller area network
(CAN) communication. There are internal diagnostics for the control module.
Signals
Page 17
Page 477
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Suspension - Rear Suspension Popping/Boinging Noise
Coil Spring Insulator: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Suspension
Popping/Boinging Noise
NO: 72 - 06 DATE: 6/28/2005 MODEL: S60, V70, S80 & XC90 CHASSIS: XC90 2003 2004
(000000-119869) (AWD and 2WD) S60 2001 2005 (000000-470972) (Not including AWD) V70
2001 2005 (000000-504591) (Not including AWD) S80 1999 2005 (000000-409499) (Not including
AWD) SUBJECT: Rear Suspension Popping / Spring Noise. REFERENCE: VIDA
THIS TECH NOTE SUPERCEDES THE PREVIOUS TNN DATED 6-21-05. PLEASE UPDATE
YOUR FILES. CHANGES ARE REMOVAL OF MY PLEASE REFER TO CHASSIS BREAKS.
DESCRIPTION: While driving over small road disturbances a popping or spring ("boing") noise
might be heard from the rear suspension. This could be caused by the rear coil spring chaffing
against the lower spring seat (see photo).
SERVICE: If a customer should experience this condition and the vehicle is within the chassis
break, install isolator PN30645888 between the spring and the lower spring seat.
WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION

Page 1474
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 543
Other Relays
Locations
System Relay: Locations
Fuses 11A/1-7

Page 285
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38
Page 1062
Check carefully that the seal is in place when the hatch is installed.
Open the vehicle's cable channel and lay down the cable harness. Close the cable channel.
The control module shall be placed in the spare wheel well's rear part on the right side, between
the two markings and below the bead of sealing compound. Remove the protective tape from the
self-adhesive Velcro fastener and install the control module. Plug in the connector from the cable
harness to the control module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Vehicles with fuel pump module originally located in spare wheel well's right trailing edge.
Install:
- new control module
- the connector to the control module
- the luggage compartment mat/floor hatches

Page 1320
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 1195
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 898
Fuses 11E/1-7
15/18-30 Distribution Rails

Page 560
Other Relays
Page 1144
Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Description and Operation Design
Design
Steering wheel buttons
The steering wheel buttons control functions and menu selection for:
- Traffic information (option)
- Audio (option)
- Carphone (option)
- Cruise control (option).
The signals from the steering wheel buttons are transmitted via serial communication. The steering
wheel buttons are connected in series to the steering wheel module (SWM) via contact reel in the
steering wheel hub. The steering wheel buttons are connected in the following order, counted from
the contact reel:
1. Cruise control 2. Audio /carphone 3. Traffic information.
There are diagnostics for the steering wheel buttons.

Page 440
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) Module, Replacing
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module (SAS), Replacing
Removal
Soundproofing panel Remove the driver's side soundproofing panel.
Control module
Remove the control module by pressing the 2 catches using a finger and pulling the control module
backwards (see the arrow in the figure).
Remove the connector and the cable.
Installation
The control module

Page 332
Repair wiring and cable terminals, using appropriate procedures. In theory, the resistance across
contacts, leads and terminals should be 0 [ohm]. However, there is always some resistance due to
terminal oxidation. If this resistance becomes too great the result will be a malfunction. The
magnitude of the resistance before it causes a malfunction depends on the circuit load.
Checks:
- Check the cables visually according to "Check Terminals Visually."
- Ignition off

Page 658
Relay Box: Service and Repair Integrated Relay/Fuse Box Cargo Compartment/Rear Electronic
Module, Replacing
correct.

Page 498
Other Relays
Page 1256
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - steering wheel module
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------

Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 864
8/44 Canister Shut-off Valve
8/51-52 FL And FR Side Airbag Igniter

Page 1206
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Steering Wheel Buttons For RTI (Road Traffic Information)
Page 1304
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source

Page 927
54/65 Connector
54/79 Connector
54/106 Connector
54/1B-106 Connectors
54/1B Connector
54/3LA-G Connector
Page 190
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1164
Other information:
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition

Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking SWM Control Unit

Page 368
Primary lock
Secondary lock
Connector Type 4
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1260
with the driver information module (DIM), check the voltage feed and ground for the control module.
VIDA
Other information
Page 1208
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Steering Wheel Module (SWM)

Page 913

Page 334
Always check the control module and control module box connectors to ensure that their pins and
sockets are not bent or damaged, as this can cause faults.
Check pins and terminals particularly for this fault. See "Check Terminals Visually."
Short-Circuit to Ground, Permanent Faults
Short-circuit to ground, permanent faults
blowing when a current is passed through the cable.
- Check terminals visually.
- Activate all switches and sensors in the circuit. Check whether the fuse blows
Use an ohmmeter to take a resistance reading between the cable and ground. The ohmmeter
should read infinite resistance if no components are connected.
Short-Circuit to Supply Voltage. Permanent Faults
Short-circuit to supply voltage. Permanent faults
fuse blowing when voltage is passed through the cable.
- Use a voltmeter to take readings at various points in the circuit while operating switches and
sensors.
Voltmeter readings will depend on which circuit is tested and the status of switches and sensors,
Use the wiring diagram to determine the correct voltage in the circuit. Use an ohmmeter between
the suspect cables to detect short-circuits between them. The ohmmeter should read infinite
resistance between cables not connected to each other in the circuit. Check pins and terminals
particularly for this fault. See "Check Terminals Visually."
Inspect Terminals Visually

Page 48
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Information

------------------------
Page 1264
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking Contact Reel
Checking contact reel
Disconnect contact reel from SWM control unit. Check resistance between B1 and B2. The
resistance should be infinite. Check resistance between B1 and B3. The resistance should be
infinite. Check resistance between B2 and B3. The resistance should be infinite. Check wire B1
between contact reel 1 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals.
Wiring and Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B2 between
contact reel 2 for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault
See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Check wire B3 between contact reel 3
for an open circuit as described in Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Wiring and
Terminals/Checking Wiring and Terminals. Permanent Fault. Do the necessary corrective action.
- For information on signals, see Signal specification See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
- To connect a test box, see Connecting the breakout box See: Pinout Values and Diagnostic
- To access/replace the contact reel, see Contact reel / steering wheel angle sensor, replacing See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Contact Reel / Steering Wheel Angle Sensor, Replacing.
Page 1469
Fuses 11B/1-10
Page 673
- Remove the outlet air pipe from the distribution box

- Remove the 3 clips. Use a screwdriver. Remove the intermediate section
- Remove the power steering fluid reservoir and the coolant reservoir. Lift them up
- Remove the intermediate section.
The connector with cable and cable protector

Page 1350
voltage according to references above.
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
Page 855
7/108-109 LH And RH Rear Side Impact Sensor
7/110-111 LH and RH Seat Temperature Sensor

Page 1336
Attempt New Test - Checking the ground terminal
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Permanent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Permanent fault
Checking power supply and ground terminals
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse is blown,
check the circuit after the fuse. Check for a short-circuit to ground before replacing the fuse. Then
replace the fuse. For further information about the circuit after the fuse, refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram. Check the cable for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment
fusebox and the control module terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the
ground lead between control module #A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit.
Check ground terminal 31/84. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access and replace the control module see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See:
Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
- Checking wiring and terminals. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Page 374
Tool
Page 475
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 1237
Finishing the read off
The read off is now complete. Exit this procedure. Log off VIDA. The completed log can now be
printed or saved. Save the log to a disc or save it locally. To save it locally, name the
filevehcom.logunderC:\volvo\logs.
Continue - DONE
-------------------------------------------------
Communication fault
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - Reading off diagnostic data
2 - Checking communication
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Checking communication
Selecting car model
1. S40 (04-) / V50.

Page 943
Always check the control module and control module box connectors to ensure that their pins and
sockets are not bent or damaged, as this can cause faults.
Short-Circuit to Ground, Permanent Faults
Short-circuit to ground, permanent faults
blowing when a current is passed through the cable.
- Check terminals visually.
- Activate all switches and sensors in the circuit. Check whether the fuse blows
Use an ohmmeter to take a resistance reading between the cable and ground. The ohmmeter
should read infinite resistance if no components are connected.
Short-Circuit to Supply Voltage. Permanent Faults
Short-circuit to supply voltage. Permanent faults
fuse blowing when voltage is passed through the cable.
- Use a voltmeter to take readings at various points in the circuit while operating switches and
sensors.
Voltmeter readings will depend on which circuit is tested and the status of switches and sensors,
Use the wiring diagram to determine the correct voltage in the circuit. Use an ohmmeter between
the suspect cables to detect short-circuits between them. The ohmmeter should read infinite
resistance between cables not connected to each other in the circuit. Check pins and terminals
particularly for this fault. See "Check Terminals Visually."
Inspect Terminals Visually

Page 635

Page 223
3/118 Climate Control Switch
3/119 Climate Control Switch, Auto
3/121 Climate Control Switch, Defroster
3/122 Climate Control Switch, Ventilation
3/123 Climate Control Switch, Floor

Page 1431
with 12 V. When the pulse wheel on clutch C1 rotates, the sensor generates a pulsed current
(quadratic wave) where the strength of the current depends on the position of the pulse wheel. The
signals from the coils in the sensor are then affected by a magnetic resistance element, which
generates a current which oscillates between 7 mA and 14 mA, and whose frequency increases
with speed. Using the signal from the sensor, the transmission control module (TCM) calculates the
transmission speed, unit rpm. The transmission control module (TCM) uses information about the
input shaft speed to calculate the torque reduction to be requested from the engine control module
(ECM) when shifting. The value is also used to compare the engine speed (RPM) with the speed of
the input shaft in order to calculate the slipping rate of the torque converter. The value is also
compared with the transmission speed sensor signal in order to calculate the actual gear ratio. This
is done to check whether the value corresponds to the expected gear ratio. There are diagnostics
for the transmission input speed sensor.
Transmission output speed sensor (speed of the output shaft)
The transmission output speed sensor (speed of the output shaft) is on the reverse of the
transmission housing. The sensor provides signals to the transmission control module (TCM) about
the vehicle speed. The output shaft speed sensor is an active sensor and is supplied with 12 V.
When the pulse wheel (wheel for shift-lock) rotates the sensor generates a pulsed current
(quadratic wave) where the strength of the current depends on the position of the pulse wheel. The
signals from the coils in the sensor are then affected by a magnetic resistance element, which
generates a current which oscillates between 7 mA and 14 mA, and whose frequency increases
with speed. The control module calculates the transmission output speed using the signals from the
sensor. The signal is compared with the signal from the transmission input speed sensor and is
used to calculate the gear ratio and is also used for diagnostics. There are diagnostics for the
transmission output speed sensor.
Oil temperature sensor
The temperature sensor is an NTC sensor. The temperature sensor is on the transmission control
system inside the side cover. It gauges the temperature of the transmission fluid in the oil pan. The
temperature sensor is integrated in the cable harness. The temperature sensor is supplied with 5 V
and is grounded via the transmission control module (TCM). The control module can determine the
transmission fluid temperature by measuring the voltage drop above the NTC resistance of the
sensor. The control module stores the time the temperature has been within a certain temperature
range. If a certain temperature and time has been exceeded, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
indicating that a oil change is necessary is stored. There are diagnostics for the temperature
sensor.
Gear-shift position sensor

Page 1224
The ohmmeter should read approximately 0 ohms.
OK - Fault Found
Not OK - Contact Resistance And Oxidation
-------------------------------------------------
Checking for open-circuits, contact resistance and oxidation For the control module,check ground
terminal 31/84 and the wiring connected to it. Check for an open-circuit. Check for contact
resistance and oxidation.
Other information:
- Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
Permanent Fault.
Page 1308
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
Page 359
Press in the locking tab on the cable terminal and carefully pull out the cable and the cable
terminal. Use tool 951 2812 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2812 Terminal
Removal Tool or tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637
Terminal Removal Tool , as illustrated.
Primary locking
Secondary locking
Connector Type 1
Connectors, repair
Special tool 951 2637 Terminal removal tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2637 Terminal
Removal Tool.
correct.
Secondary lock
Page 1229
Attempt New Test - Checking the ground terminal
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Permanent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Permanent fault
Checking power supply and ground terminals
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse is blown,
check the circuit after the fuse. Check for a short-circuit to ground before replacing the fuse. Then
replace the fuse. For further information about the circuit after the fuse, refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram. Check the cable for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment
fusebox and the control module terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the
ground lead between control module #A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit.
Check ground terminal 31/84. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access and replace the control module see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See:
Steering Column Control Module/Service and Repair
- Checking wiring and terminals. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Page 54
Note! The connectors on the adapter cable must have the correct color-coding for the signal table
to match.
Audio control module (to aerial)
Audio control module (cable between the audio module and the amplifier)
Page 1023
Page 1213
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking components
Hint: If the turn signal lamp switch status is OK, the fault is not in the steering wheel module
(SWM).
Page 909
20/27 Shunt, Low Beam CEM
20/28 Shunt, Parking Light REM
20/29 Shunt, Fog Light REM
20/31 Shunt, Brake Light REM
20/32 Shunt, Indicator CEM, Left

Page 945
If the reading is not correct. Replace the cable and/or continue according to "Contact Resistance
and Oxidation". Always check the control module and control module box connectors to ensure that
their pins and sockets are not bent or damaged, this may cause faults. Check pins and terminals
particularly carefully.
Short-Circuit to Ground, Intermittent Faults
Short-circuit to ground, intermittent faults
blowing when a current is passed through the cable. Repair wiring and cable terminals as required,
using appropriate procedures. Checks:
- Check the cables visually according to "Inspect Terminals Visually". Activate all switches and
sensors in the circuit. Check whether the fuse blows.
Connect an ohmmeter between cable and ground. The ohmmeter should read infinite resistance if
no components are connected. Shake the cable lightly and pull on connectors during measurement
to locate the damage. If the value is not correct, try a new cable and/or continue according to
Short-Circuit to Supply Voltage. Intermittent Faults
Short-circuit to supply voltage, intermittent faults
fuse blowing when a current is passed through the cable.

Page 237
6/67 Pump, Fuel Leakage Control
6/69 Damper Motor, Ventilation/Floor/Defroster
6/71 Stepper Motor, Speed-dependent Power Steering
6/92-93 Motor, RL And RR Power Window

Page 728
- Press the control module onto the bracket by the side member.
- Slacken off the rear screw (1) in the bracket for the accessory electronic module a few turns
- Insert the grooved end of the lock facing (2) under the screw head. Position as illustrated
- Tighten the screw. Tighten to 10 Nm (8 lbf. ft.).
- Install the fuse from the kit in position 11 in the fuse holder.
- Reinstall the panels in the cargo compartment
- Reinstall the two screws in the tailgate sill trim panel
- Reinstall the side cushion
- Fold the backrest back into place
- Reinstall the seat cushions.

Page 1217
Is there a fault?
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Windshield Wiper Switch
Checking components
Page 1388
- Check that the two springs (1) are in position
- Press the two connectors for the sender cables for the airbag into the steering wheel module.
Note! The wiring must be routed through the existing holder (2).
- Insert the two pins on the reverse of the steering wheel module in the two springs. Ensure that the
sender cables are unimpeded
- Press the steering wheel module into the mountings. Two clicks should be heard.
- Turn the ignition key to position II
- Reconnect the battery negative lead.

Page 729
- Reinstall the cargo compartment carpet

Page 583
Order software.
NOTE: The VIN number of the vehicle consists of 17 characters. The 7th character from the left
indicates the installation plant. The last 6 characters are the chassis number. A 1 indicates
Torslanda as the installation plant. A 2 indicates Europe Car as the installation plant.
Order software.
Order software.
Finishing
Program in the data read off from the old control module.
Page 473
Fuses 11B/11-23

Page 315
54/34 Connector
54/35 Connector
54/37 Connector
54/39 Connector
54/40 Connector
Interior Lighting and Upper Electronic Module (UEM),
Replacing
Power Mirror Control Module: Service and Repair Interior Lighting and Upper Electronic Module
(UEM), Replacing
Interior Lighting And Upper Electronic Module (UEM), Replacing
Removal
- Fold down the cover.
- Press the catches outwards. Remove the lens
Installation
- Install the bulb

- Press the lens into place
Replacing the bulb holder in the rear view mirror unit The upper electronic module (UEM) is
integrated in the rear view mirror.
Removal
- Remove the lens

Page 774
- Connect the connectors
- Install the nut and screw
- Install the door panel.
Ordering software
Finishing
Initialise the window position in the communication input
Removing the upper panel
- Remove the control module, see instruction Removing the control module.
- Disconnect the catches. Lift the upper panel from the control module.
Installing the upper panel

Page 1337
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Checking the Power Supply and Ground Terminals. Intermittent Fault
Checking the power supply and ground terminals. Intermittent fault
Checking the power supply and ground for the control module
22 in the passenger compartment fusebox for the steering wheel module. Note! If the fuse was
blown, check the circuit after the fuse. Check for contact resistance and oxidation. Check the cable
for power supply between fuse 22 in the passenger compartment fusebox and the control module
terminals #A1 and #A6. Check for an open-circuit. Check the ground lead between control module
#A22 and ground terminal 31/84. Check for an open-circuit. Check ground terminal 31/84. Check
for contact resistance and oxidation. Remedy as necessary.
Other information:
- To access the control module, see Steering wheel module (SWM), replacing See: Steering
Column Control Module/Service and Repair
Page 329
Abbreviations
Groups
Group 23 = Fuel system
Group 26 = Cooling system
Group 27 = Engine controls
Group 32 = Generator and voltage regulator
Group 33 = Starting system
Group 35 = Lighting
Group 36 = Additional electrical equipment
Group 37 = Wiring and fuses
Group 38 = Instruments
Group 39 = Other
Group 43 = Transmission
Group 59 = Brake system
Group 64 = Steering
Group 83 = Doors and openings
Group 84 = Exterior decorative elements etc.
Group 85 = Interior equipment
Group 87 = Climate controls
Group 88 = Internal equipment
Ignition switch symbols
x = Accessories (audio position)
S = Powered upon insertion of key
15 = The switch remains connected during start
15l = Contact is broken while starting
30 = Constant power from the battery
50 = Start
Countries/Markets
A = Austria
AUS = Australia
B = Belgium
CDN = Canada
CH = Switzerland
D = Germany
DK = Denmark
E = Spain
EU/OS = Markets outside USA and Canada
FIN = Finland
GB = Great Britain
ISR = Israel
J = Japan
KOR = Korea
N = Norway
NL = Netherlands
S = Sweden
USA = United States of America
WEU = Western Europe
Other
ACC = Accessory
AMP = Amplifier
AUDIO = Audio system
AUTO = Automatic transmission
BIX = Bi-Xenon
CEM = Central Electronic Module
DENSO = Fuel control system, gasoline
DSTC = Dynamic Stability Traction Control
E.E = Early edition

Page 53
Note! The connectors on the adapter cable must have the correct color-coding for the signal table
to match.
Audio control module (AUM)/External amplifier to loudspeakers, gray connector

Page 947
- Ignition off
- Press grease, P/N 1161417-9, into the terminals directly from the tube
- Check that all the cavities in the connectors are filled
- Use a loose male pin to ensure that contact in sockets is good. The pin should remain in position
when pulled gently.
Connector
Connectors, repair
correct.
Connector
Page 192
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 1203
- Ignition off.
- Ignition on.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------

Control Module FL Door DDM/PDM

Page 885
11C/1-17
11C/18-25
Page 843
6/33 Fuel Pump
6/37 Lock Motor, Fuel Filler Flap
6/38-39 LH And RH Headlight Level Adjustment Motor

Page 277
11C/26-31
11C/32-38
11 D-E/no. Fuses In Cargo Compartment

Page 1427
Page 1041
Engine Control Module: Tools and Equipment
Volvo ECU Release Key
AST tool# V9995722
Volvo ECU Release Key. Applicable to: V70 XC (01-) / XC70, C70 Coupe, V70 (-00), V70 XC (-00),
S80, XC90, V70 (00-), S60, C70 Conv, S70.
- Made in Germany
- Call AST for Pricing
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943

Page 1192
Yes - Fault Found
No - No Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Condition
Possible source
Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Read and Reset Button on the Turn Signal Lamp Switch
Checking the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch
Checking components
Activate the read and reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Hint: If the read and reset button status is OK the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
-------------------------------------------------
Other information:
-------------------------------------------------
Checking components
Activate the reset button on the turn signal lamp switch. Read off the status.
Page 1149
Check therefore:
Other information
1 - steering wheel module
3 - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------

Selecting car model
(-04) / V40
------------------------
Diagnostic outlet
Page 970
Primary locking
Check that the catches for the cable terminal are undamaged. Press the cable terminal into the
housing. Check that the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable.
Secondary locking
Connector Type 2
Connectors, repair
Removal Tool
Page 1380
Signal Specification, Steering Wheel Module (SWM)
Signal specification
General
Ullow, voltage close to 0 V. UIbat, battery voltage
Note! It is important to connect the breakout box and check the ground terminals before taking
readings.
Connector A
Page 1360
------------------------
FAULT FOUND - Trouble-shooting information
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading control unit id

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 633
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 1273
Condition
Possible source

Fault symptom[s]
Checking the Audio / Carphone Switch
Checking the audio / carphone switch
Checking components
- Ignition on.
correct result, the fault is not in the steering wheel module (SWM).
Page 191
Fuses 11C/26-31
Fuses 11C/32-38

Page 1005
Release the relevant secondary lock by adjusting the locks with an electrician's screwdriver, as
illustrated.
Primary lock
Page 880
10/126 RH Front Courtesy Lighting

Page 289
Fuses 11E/1-7
15/18-30 Distribution Rails

Page 1110
Fuses 11C/1-17
Fuses 11C/18-25
Page 1331
The ohmmeter should read approximately 0 ohms.
OK - Fault Found
Not OK - Contact Resistance And Oxidation
-------------------------------------------------
Checking for open-circuits, contact resistance and oxidation For the control module,check ground
terminal 31/84 and the wiring connected to it. Check for an open-circuit. Check for contact
resistance and oxidation.
Other information:
- Checking wiring and terminals. Permanent fault See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
Permanent Fault.
Page 905
16/62 Hand Unit, Mobile Phone
16/64 Antenna, Mobile Telephone
16/65 Antenna Ring/ignition Switch Lighting
16/67 Amplifier Antenna, Bumper
16/68 Antenna, Bumper

Page 646
Fuses 11E/1-7
Relays
Page 358
Press in the active catches on both sides of the socket housing and slide out the receptacle
housings.
Primary lock
Page 906
16/71 Window Antenna Amplifier 1 Right
16/77 Microphone, Mobile Telephone

Page 861
8/18 EVAP Valve
8/19 Variable Valve Timing Valve
8/28 Turbocharger Control Valve
8/30 Driver Side Airbag Igniter
8/31 Passenger Side Airbag Igniter

Page 216
3/9 Brake Light Contact
3/10 Reversing Light Contact
3/25 Power Sunroof Switch

Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation System - Various Malfunctions
TIE - Technical Journal
Title: New SW upgrade disc for RTI, MMM, MMM+, and MMM2 available
Ref No: US15493.10.2 en-GB
Issuer: -
Partner: 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America
Func Group: 3972 Func Desc road navigation
Status: Released
Status Date: 2010-06-03
Issue date: 2010-06-03
Reference:
Attachment Vehicle Type
CSC
DTC
Text
This RTJ supersedes the previous one dated June 2, 2010, Changes to this document are:
- SW version corrected to 8BC6.
- Note added for clarification of Service SW disc purpose.
CSC = Customer Symptom Code
DTC = Diagnostic Trouble Code
MMM = Multi Media Module

Page 741
- Unscrew the front clip.
- Turn the knob (1) on the right/left side 90°.
- Fold the panels inwards. Lift the panels out
- Remove the two covers (2) and the screws (3) underneath (applies to S80 only).
- First pull the boot lid sill panel (4) forward until the two clips on the right/left side release. Pull hard
but carefully as the panel is securely fastened. Then pull the panel straight up until the four clips in
the bottom edge release.
- Remove the wiring (5) for the cargo compartment lighting.
- Lift out the sill trim panel.
- Take the wiring harness (1) from the kit. Position it along the boot lid sill with the black connector
to the right, in the rear edge on the right wheel housing.
- Take five cable ties (3) from the kit and secure the wiring harness to the existing wiring harness
as illustrated.
Page 876
10/29 Glove Compartment Lighting
10/44-45, 10/51-52 RH Tail Light Lamp 1/2, LH Tail Light Lamp 1/2

Page 899
16/1 Audio
Page 942
- Press grease, P/N 1161417-9, into the female sockets directly from tube
- Check that all the terminal cavities are filled
- Use a loose male pin to ensure that the connection in the sockets is good. The pin should remain
in position when pulled gently.
Open-Circuit, Permanent Faults
Open-circuit, permanent faults
An open-circuit in a cable is indicated by a loss of one or more functions. Chafed and broken
cables or terminals that have come loose are common causes of faults in electrical systems.
[ohm] if there is no open-circuit in the cable
If the reading is not correct. Replace the cable and/or continue, according to "Contact Resistance
and Oxidation"
Page 1253
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - Reading control unit id

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1374
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Page 1033
Page 1026
Page 34
Diagnostic outlet
above.
Control modules
VIDA
Other information
------------------------
Page 757
- Remove both side cushions. First pull the upper edge of the cushions backwards. Then lift the
cushions upwards.
Applies to the S60
- Remove the cargo compartment carpet at the rear edge. First turn the two handles (1) 90°.
Applies to the S60
- Pull up the front of the cargo compartment carpet. Fold the front half back over the rear half of the
cargo compartment carpet.
Applies to the S60

Page 247
7/115 LH And RH Front Side Impact Sensor
7/120 RL Angle Sensor

Page 398
Installation
Primary lock
the cable terminal is properly locked by pulling carefully on the cable,
The secondary lock
Finishing work
Install the relays.
Install the relevant relay box.
Splicing the Cables

Splicing the cables
Strip the wire
Peel 5.0mm / 0.2 in of the insulation off the 4 cable ends (13/64 inches) using pliers951 2620
Stripping tool See: Tools and Equipment/951 2620 Stripping Tool.
Page 1332
Select Continue when the fault has been remedied.
-------------------------------------------------
Verification
Page 1216
-------------------------------------------------
Replace the windscreen-wiper switch
- To replace windscreen-wiper switch, see Washer / wiper switch, replacing See: Sensors and
-------------------------------------------------
Hint: If read-out of status on windscreen-wiper switch gave a correct result the fault was in the
windscreen-wiper switch.
Yes - Fault Found
-------------------------------------------------
Page 507
Verify functionality 3
Verify the function of all brake lights, tail lights, rear fog light, and reinstall cargo compartment Trim
panels.
Page 217
3/37 Horn Contact
3/47 Parking Brake Contact
3/53 Recirculation Switch
3/56 Fan Switch
3/59 Control, Beam Adjustment

Page 242
7/25 Impulse Sensor
7/31-32 LH And RH Front ABS Sensor
7/41 Temperature Sensor, Evaporator

Page 151
opening. Use a screwdriver
Installation
- Connect the connector for the rear view mirror and control module
- Reinstall the cover for the rear view mirror and control module connector
CAUTION: Check that the microphone cable is not trapped (if applicable).
- Install the lens.
Removal
- Remove the lens.
- Remove the bulb holder.
- Remove the bulbs
- Remove the screws
- Remove the back piece from the switch
- Detach and remove the printed circuit board and switch.Replace the switch for the sun roof.
Installation In reverse order.
Rear view mirror, replacing
NOTE: A rear view mirror with manual function cannot be replaced with automatic anti-dazzle or
vice versa. The car will store diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
The upper electronic module (UEM) is integrated in the rear view mirror.
Replacing the upper electronic module (UEM), or the rear view mirror
Preparations
software.

Page 76
Page 766
- Reinstall the cargo compartment carpet
Central Electronic Module (CEM), Replacing
Central electronic module (CEM), replacing
Exposing and removing relay box in passenger compartment
Note! Applies to vehicles -2003, All ignition keys are needed when programming a new control
module.
Note! For vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call (see phone's keypad) the battery's minus lead shall
be removed first. Otherwise the automatic alarm for emergency services may be triggered. See
Disconnecting
erase the mileage.
For further information, see Downloading software and replacing the control module See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Downloading
Software and Replacing the Control Module/Central Electronic Module (CEM)
Removing soundproofing panel on driver's side

Page 1167
No - Car equipment
-------------------------------------------------
Car equipment
Is the car equipped with the Road Traffic Information (RTI) system?
-------------------------------------------------

Page 43
- Ignition off
- Main unit disconnected.
terminal.
Page 655
Remove:
- the screws on the front edge
- the holder from the base section using a screwdriver
- holder with the cable lead in from the base section and push to one side.
Base section
Page 1074
Other Relays
Page 1049
Fuses 11D/1-7
Fuses 11D/8-18
Page 244
7/62 Output Speed Sensor
7/73 Coolant Level Monitor
7/74 Oil Temperature Sensor, Automatic Transmission
7/77 Temperature Sensor, Intake Air
7/81 Pressure Sensor, Intake Manifold

Page 709
- Remove both the floor hatches. First lift the rear edges of the floor hatches slightly. Then pull the
- Remove the storage box under the rear floor hatch by turning the clip on the right and left-hand
side 90°. Lift out the box.
- Remove the left folding panel from the cargo compartment.

Page 1004
Expose the relevant relay box. Remove the relevant relays, noting their position.
Dismantling
Secondary lock
Page 1176
- Ignition off.
switch unit.
- Ignition on.
unit.
- To access cruise control switch unit, see the relevant service procedure.
Yes - Fault Found
no - Checking the wires and components
-------------------------------------------------

Page 1379
------------------------
-------------------------------------------------
Yes - YES
No - NO
------------------------
YES - digital display

NO - FAILED
-------------------------------------------------
Page 1463
The Active On-demand Coupling (AOC) can be described as a hydraulic pump. The basic pressure
is generated by the electronic feed pump. This pressurizes the annular pistons with oil so that they
are pressed against the cam disc via rollers. The annular piston generates a working pressure
which is led to the operating piston via the pressure valve. This pressure creates a fixed connection
between the input and output shafts. The maximum pressure is limited by the pressure limiting
valve. The difference in speed between the input and output shafts is in proportion to the oil
pressure fed to the annular pistons. A large difference between the input and output shafts results
in high oil pressure to the annular pistons. If the input and output shafts are at the same speed, the
oil pressure to the annular pistons is less. The oil pressure at the multi-plate clutch is regulated by
the control valve. The axial solenoid controls the control valve. A closed control valve gives
maximum pressure to the multi-plate clutch, resulting in maximum power transmission. An open
control valve gives minimum pressure to the multi-plate clutch, resulting in limited power
transmission. The accumulator maintains the basic pressure in the system. The oil filter keeps the
fluid clean by filtering dirt and small particles which could damage the system.
Diagnostic functions General
A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored if the control module detects a fault. Should a fault
disappear for any reason after being permanently stored in the control module as a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC), the information remains stored in the control module.
Stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be read off and erased using this function.
Brake Control Module (BCM), Replacing
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Brake Control Module (BCM), Replacing
Brake control module (BCM), replacing
Removal
Preparation
Note! In week 35 year 2001 a new brake control module (BCM) is being introduced along with a
new sensor in the brake electronics.
Remove the battery cable. See Battery, disconnecting See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service
Remove the air cleaner (ACL) housing. See Brake pipe master cylinder / ABS unit, replacing See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe
Master Cylinder / ABS Unit, Replacing.
Removing the integrated relay / fusebox
Remove the integrated relay / fusebox. Remove the connector for the ABS unit. See Brake pipe
from hydraulic unit / front wheel / junction, replacing See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic
System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Brake Pipe From Hydraulic Unit / Front Wheel /
Junction, Replacing. Remove the screw on the bracket. Lift the box out of the bracket and put it to
one side.
Disconnecting the connector

Volvo - S40 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2002

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volvo - S40 - Workshop Manual - 2000 - 2002

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Page 897

11D/No. Fuses In Cargo Compartment Fuse Box

11E Main Fuses At Battery

Cargo Compartment Fuses

- the control module. Tighten to 1.8 Nm

6/96 Damper Motor, Temperature, RH Side

6/102 Damper Motor, Defroster

6/103 Damper Motor, Floor/Ventilation

Continue - Fault Found

Checking communication errors car model S40 (-04) / V40

Communication cables k-line

Communication cable for cruise control as own system (not integrated)

3/135 RTI Switch

3/155 Automatic Transmission Program Selector

3/156 Gear Shift Module GSM, Automatic Transmission

Passenger Compartment Fuses

Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation System - Various Malfunctions

TIE - Technical Journal

Ref No: US15493.10.2 en-GB

Partner: 3 US 7510 Volvo Cars North America

Func Group: 3972 Func Desc road navigation

Status Date: 2010-06-03

Issue date: 2010-06-03

- SW version corrected to 8BC6.

- Note added for clarification of Service SW disc purpose.

CSC = Customer Symptom Code

DTC = Diagnostic Trouble Code

MMM = Multi Media Module

11A Main Fuses In Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Engine Compartment Fuses

The secondary lock

Press the secondary lock into place.

Power Seat Module (PSM), Replacing

Power seat module (PSM), replacing

Raise the seat to its highest position.

For first generation power seats:

For second generation power seats:

Remove the key.

Wait 1 minute before starting work.

Installing the control module

- the control module

- the three screws (2) in the right-hand floor support

- the floor support.

Applies to S60 and S80

Applies to the V70

Gear selector assembly and steering wheel module

Removing the gear selector assembly and steering wheel module

- the cover, steering column and boot

S60according to Steering wheel, replacing See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering

- V70according to Replacing the steering wheel See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering

- Release the two clips

- Pull straight out.

Installing the gear selector assembly and steering wheel module

- Press the sill panel into place.

- Reinstall the screws in the panel. Tighten.

For the location of the relays, see:

- Remove the cover from the fusebox

- Remove the relay / fuse.

Yes - Fault Found

- No SWM diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the CEM

- No diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in the SWM.

- Defective indicator switch

- Defective control unit.